M456 - E5 - Ti TIRF TIRF-E TRIF-PAU & PAGFP Series - Setup PDF

M456 E 10.9.NF.
*M456EN05*
Series
TI-TIRF Illuminator Unit

TI-TIRF-E Motorized Illuminator Unit
TI-PAU Photo Activation Illuminator Unit
TI-TIRF-PAU Illuminator
LU4-B5 Beamsplitter 50/50
Setup Manual
<For Authorized Nikon Personnel>
WARNING
This manual is intended to provide setup instructions for Nikon
representatives who have attended the lecture on laser safety and have been
trained in setup operations. Attempts by others to set up the product may
lead to accidents or equipment failure. NIKON is not responsible for personal
injury or equipment damage resulting from equipment setup performed by
unqualified persons.
Be sure to observe the warnings and cautions described in this manual to

ensure safety during setup.
Introduction
This setup manual is written for service personnel who is installing the Nikon TIRF Illuminator Unit,
Motorized TIRF Illuminator Unit, Photo Activation Illuminator Unit, TIRF-PAU Illuminator, and Beamsplitter
50/50 for Ti Series Inverted Microscopes.
To ensure correct installation, read this manual carefully before installing the product.
• No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form without prior written permission from
Nikon.
• The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
• This manual contains confidential information. Do not disclose this manual to a third party other than the
authorized Nikon personnel.
• Although every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of this manual, errors or inconsistencies may
remain. If you note any points that are unclear or incorrect, please contact a Nikon Service Department.
• Some of the equipment described in this manual may not be included in the set you are installing.
• If you intend to use any other equipment with this product, read the manual for that equipment too.
• If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the
equipment may be impaired.
1
Safety Precautions
To ensure correct and safe operation, read this manual before using the product.
WARNING and CAUTION Symbols Used in This Manual

Although this product is designed and manufactured to be completely safe during use, incorrect usage or
failure to follow the safety instructions provided may cause personal injury or property damage. To ensure
correct installation, read the setup manual carefully and thoroughly before installing the product.
Safety instructions in this manual are marked with the following symbols to highlight their importance. For
your safety, always follow the instructions marked with these symbols.
Symbol Description
Disregarding instructions marked with this symbol may lead to serious injury
WARNING or death.
Disregarding instructions marked with this symbol may lead to injury or

CAUTION property damage.
All procedures should be performed safely and in accordance with the

instructions in this manual to prevent accidents or equipment failures.
2
Safety Precautions
Meaning of the Symbols Used on the Product

The symbols marked on the product indicate the need for caution at all times during use.
Always refer to the instruction manual and read the relevant instructions before manipulating any part
to which the symbol is marked.
Symbol Meaning
Warning label - laser hazard symbol

This symbol is displayed on the laser safety cover or on the stage to warn that the product
emits laser light.
Your eyes or skin may be exposed to the laser light emitted from the objective, resulting in
injury.
Precautions against heat

This symbol, affixed to the top of the dia pillar illuminator, the rear side of the 12V-100W
lamp house, the HG fiber light source, and the rear side of the super-high pressure
mercury lamp (or the xenon lamp) house, calls your attention.
• The lamp and the lamphouse become hot while the lamp is lit and immediately after it
is turned off.
• Do not touch the lamp and the lamphouse while the lamp is on and immediately after it
is turned off to prevent the risk of burns.
• Make sure that the lamp and the lamphouse are sufficiently cool before the lamp
replacement.
Biohazard
This symbol on the upper part of the microscope calls your attention on the following:
• If a specimen is spilled onto the product, it may cause the danger of biohazard.
• To avoid biohazard contamination, do not touch the contaminated portion with your
bare hands.
• Decontaminate the contaminated portion according to the standard procedure of your
facility.
General attention
This symbol is displayed on the top of the protection plate (for nosepiece) appended to the
Ti-E and Ti-E/B and the protection plate (for PFS6 nosepiece) appended to the TI-ND6-PFS
motorized PFS6 nosepiece. It calls your attention on the following:
• To avoid accidents such as finger pinching and exposure to laser radiation, install this
product in the correct position.
3
Safety Precautions
WARNING
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
1. Laser class
This product is a laser apparatus that uses Class 3B lasers (air-cooled Ar lasers, He-Ne lasers,
semiconductor lasers). Accidental exposure of eyes or skin to laser light may result in injury or
other problems. Confirm that there is no one in the area before turning on the lasers. Always wear
laser-protection goggles when using the laser.
2. Laser safety
This product is designed and manufactured in compliance with the Performance Standards for
Light-Emitting Products established by the U.S. FDA and the IEC Laser Product Safety Standard
(IEC 60825-1), except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No.50. Those using this laser
product must complete laser safety courses and setup training. Users are requested to take all
appropriate safety measures specified by the preceding standards, in accordance with local laws
and regulations.
The laser safety officer (LSO) must take charge of this laser product and users should follow the
instructions from the LSO.
FDA Class 3B Laser Product (Laser Notice No. 50)
IEC Class 3B Laser Product
LASER RADIATION
AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM
CLASS 3B LASER PRODUCT
Wavelength: 400 to 700 nm (CW)

Beam divergence: 0.01 to 2.91 rad
Maximum power or energy output: total power 500 mW Max. (CW)
3. Manuals and accessories

All manuals and accessories used in this laser product and provided by the distributor must be
provided to the user.
4. Intended application of the product

This product can be used only for microscopic observations. This product is required to be
attached to the specific Nikon microscope, Ti-E, Ti-E/B, Ti-U, Ti-U/B. Do not use this product for
other purpose.
5. Setting up the product

Setup of this product must be handled by trained service personnel.
This task should not be performed by anyone other than the trained service personnel. If
performed, it may result in improper setup, impairing system performance and exposing the eyes
or skin to the laser light, resulting in injury.
4
Safety Precautions
WARNING
6. Prohibition of dismount
This product uses a laser device. Use only in the configuration set up by the Nikon representative.
To ensure safety, never attempt to remove any part of the system. Before beginning operations,
confirm that all of the parts listed below are in place. Removal of any following part during use may
result in unintended exposure of eyes or skin to laser light.
Make sure that all powers to the laser and entire system are turned off when removing an objective
or a filter cube.
Eyepiece tube, nosepiece, objective, TIRF/motorized TIRF illuminator unit, photo activation
illuminator Unit, TIRF-PAU illuminator, filter cube, sage, lamp house, HG fiber adapter,
epi-fl filter turret, 3D-STORM port, TV camera, video camera, or all port caps
7. Do not disassemble.
Disassembling this product may result in electric shock or other hazards.
Never attempt to disassemble any piece of equipment included in this product.
In particular, disassembling any of the components when the laser is on may cause the laser light
to be improperly emitted from this product. If you notice that this product is not functioning properly,
immediately stop use, switch off the power switches to all devices, disconnect the power cables
from the outlets, and contact your nearest Nikon representative.
8. Pre-operation check items

Before using the system, always confirm the followings.
If the following conditions are not satisfied, laser light may be irradiated from openings or reflected
from reflective objects, and unintended exposure of eyes and skin to laser light may result.
1 A cap, 3D-STORM port, a TV camera, or a video camera is attached to each port.
2 An objective or a cap is attached to each socket of the nosepiece.
3 The optical fiber for laser light is securely fixed.
4 The adapter for the HG fiber light source (or the lamphouse) is attached for epi illumination.
And the lamphouse is attached for the dia illumination.
5 The epi-fl filter turret is attached correctly. (Its cover is attached too.)
6 The field diaphragm unit is attached correctly.
7 The laser safety cover is attached on the stage. (The specimen cover is attached for TI-PAU.)
8 There is no mirror or other highly reflective piece of metal in the area surrounding the lens
aperture.
9. Never attempt to look into the laser light.

When the laser is on, a powerful beam of light is emitted above the stage through the objective.
Never look into this beam or reflected beams. When the laser is on, put on laser safety goggles.
To prevent reflection of the laser light emitted from the objectives and resulting inadvertent
exposure of eyes or skin to laser light, never place reflective objects on the stage or in the
diascopic optical path.
TIRF PA TIRF-PA
• NOHD: 2502 m 8.9 m 1904 m for 1x objective.
MPE at the cornea for exposure to laser radiation: 1 W/m2 (400 nm to 700 nm CW)
MPE of the skin to laser radiation: 2000 W/m2 (400 nm to 700 nm CW)
5
Safety Precautions
WARNING
10. Cautions about heat from the light source
The symbols affixed to the top of the dia pillar illuminator, the rear side of the lamp house, and
the HG fiber light source indicate that the relevant lamp and its surrounding area become very hot
while the lamp is lit or right after the lamp is turned off.
Also, the symbol affixed above the air vent of the HG fiber light source indicates that hot air
blows out of the air vent while the lamp is lit.
Follow the cautions below to prevent burn injury and fire.
• Never touch the lamp, its surrounding parts, and the air vents while the lamp is lit or within
30 minutes after the lamp is turned off.
• Keep hands away from the air vents when the lamp is lit. Do not block the airflow from the air
vents.
• Make sure that the lamp and its surroundings are sufficiently cool before the lamp replacement.
• Do not allow walls, curtains, or papers to contact the product.
• Do not allow cloths, papers, or highly flammable volatile materials, such as gasoline, benzine,
thinner or alcohol, to come near the lamp, its surrounding parts, or the air vents while the lamp is
lit or within 30 minutes after the lamp is turned off.
• Do not draw any power cord on the product body.
11. Mercury lamp and xenon lamp

The mercury lamp (or the xenon lamp) used with this product requires special handling. To use the
system safely and correctly, read the warnings below and be aware of potential dangers. Also,
carefully read the manuals of the light source (HG fiber light source, super-high pressure mercury
lamp power supply, and high-intensity light source) to be used and the manuals published by the
lamp manufacturer if provided, and follow their instructions.
1 The mercury lamp (or the xenon lamp) radiates ultraviolet light that is harmful to the eyes and
skin when the lamp is turned on. Direct viewing of light from these lamps may result in
blindness.
2 Gas is sealed under very high pressure inside the lamps. The pressure increases when the
lamp is on. If the lamp is scratched, dirty, subjected to high external pressure or physical
impact, or used beyond its operational life, the sealed gas may escape or the lamp may burst.
This can result in someone inhaling the gas, injuring themselves on the glass, or other
accidents.
3 When the lamp is on, the lamp and its surroundings become extremely hot. Touching the
lamp with bare hands could result in burns. Flammable materials placed near the lamp could
ignite.
4 Using other than the specified type of lamp could result in an accident, such as a burst.
The hazards described above should not pose any danger as long as you heed all of the warnings
and cautions in the manuals and use the system only for its intended purpose because safety is a
top priority in the design of Nikon products. However, the hazards described above could lead to
an accident if you fail to heed all of the warnings and cautions in the manuals, if you strike the
system, or if you attempt to disassemble the system. Therefore, always be sure to heed all of the
warnings and cautions.
12. Use the ultraviolet light shield

Do not directly see the light irradiated from the objective. Harmful excitation light will be given out
from the objective depending on the excitation method used. When you see the part around the
objective, be sure to see through the ultraviolet light shield.
6
Safety Precautions
WARNING
13. Notes on handling flammable solvent
The following flammable solvents are used with the product:
• Immersion oil (Nikon Immersion Oil for oil immersion objectives)
• Absolute alcohol (ethyl alcohol or methyl alcohol for cleaning optical parts)
• Petroleum benzine (for wiping the immersion oil)
• Medical alcohol (for disinfecting the microscopy)
Never hold a flame near these solvents. To use solvent, read the instructions provided by the
manufacturer and handle the solvent correctly and safely. Note the following precautions to use a
solvent with the product.
• Keep solvent from the heat of the lamp, the lamphouse, and the power supply device.
• Do not bring solvent near the product or its surroundings when turning on/off the power switch or
plugging/unplugging the power cord.
• Be careful not to spill solvent.
7
Safety Precautions
CAUTION
1. Precautions on power supply ratings and power cords
Before connecting the power cords to wall outlets, check your power-line ratings to make sure that
the input voltage and current capacity requirements of the products are sufficient. Using a wrong
power cord may result in malfunction, failure, or fire. Always use power cords that satisfy local
safety regulations. Always use three-pole grounded outlets.
2. Precautions on connecting cables

Always switch off the power switches to all devices before connecting or disconnecting cables.
To prevent wires from breaking, do not pull cables by the sheath; instead, firmly grasp the plug
when connecting or disconnecting a cable.
3. Emergency stop
In an emergency, turn off all power switches and unplug the power cords.
4. Do not wet the product.

Do not wet nor spill a liquid on the product to avoid malfunction, over-heating, or electric shock. If a
device is subject to contact with water, immediately switch off the power switch to that device and
wipe off the water with a dry cloth. If water enters a device, immediately suspend use of the
product, unplug the power cord from the outlet, and contact your nearest Nikon representative.
5. Do not place any object on the product.

To prevent deformation, failure, or malfunction, and to avoid injury, never place any objects (heavy
ones in particular) on any part of the system.
8
Safety Precautions
CAUTION
6. Notes on Handling the Product
1. Handle the product carefully.
The product is a precision optical instrument. Handle the product with care to avoid a physical
shock or an impact. Optical-fiber cables, in particular, must not be bent or pulled with
excessive force, to prevent failure, malfunction, or wires from breaking.
2. Notes on handling optical parts
Scratches or dirt such as fingerprints on an optical component (such as a lenses or a filter)
will degrade microscope images. Carefully use the optical parts. Do not damage them. If any
part becomes dirty, clean it according to the manuals for respective units.
3. Installation location
To ensure safe and reliable operations, check the following conditions when installing this
product:
• To prevent the product from falling and to avoid eventual failure, install each component of
the product on a level surface.
• Install the product in a clean place with little dust and dirt. Dust or dirt degrades system
performance significantly.
• Use this product at ambient temperatures of between +5 and +35°C and in conditions of
humidity of 60% or less (no condensation). Using the product in hot or humid conditions
may result in condensation or malfunction.
• Make sure that the product is not subject to strong vibrations, which may degrade image
quality. Consult with Nikon representatives about preventive measures you may take when
the product is installed.
• To prevent degradation, malfunction, or failure of the laser and the PC, always use power
supply that is free from electric noise or sudden voltage fluctuations.
• To prevent failure, do not block or place any obstacles near the cooling fans of the
controller and the laser. When the product is installed near a wall, be sure to provide a
clearance of 15 cm or more between the wall and the product.
• Install the product at a place where all the power cables can be pulled out easily in an
emergency.
4. Cleaning
Use a dry and soft cloth to clean painted, plastic, and printed parts. If necessary, wipe these
parts with a cloth moistened with diluted neutral detergent, then wipe off the moisture with a
soft and dry cloth. To prevent discoloration or deformation of painted or plastic parts or
removal of the printed letters/figures, do not use organic solvents such as paint thinner or
alcohol.
5. Other categories
Be sure to follow the instructions specified in this manual. Failure to do so may result in
impaired performance, malfunction, failure, or unexpected hazards.
9
How to Use This Manual
Configuration of This Manual
This setup manual is made up of two parts. Refer to the part which deals with the product you are setting up.
• Part 1 For Setting Up TI-TIRF, TI-TIRF-E, or TI-PAU

• Part 2 For Setting Up TI-TIRF-PAU and LU4-B5
10
Part 1
For Setting Up TI-TIRF, TI-TIRF-E, or TI-PAU
Series
Setup Manual
Contents
1. System Configurations and Part Names............................................................................................ 1-4

1.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 1-4
1.1.1 TIRF Illuminator Unit and Ti-U System Overview .............................................................. 1-4
1.1.2 Motorized TIRF Illuminator Unit and Ti-E System Overview ............................................. 1-8
1.1.3 Motorized TIRF Illuminator Unit, LU4A, N-STORM, and Ti-E System Overview............. 1-12
1.1.4 TI-PAU Photo Activation Illuminator Unit and Ti-U System Overview.............................. 1-14
1.2 Optical Paths of Lasers ................................................................................................................ 1-18
1.2.1 Laser Unit......................................................................................................................... 1-18
1.2.2 Microscope Part (TIRF Illuminator Unit and Ti-U System)............................................... 1-19
1.2.3 Microscope Part (Motorized TIRF Illuminator Unit and Ti-E System) .............................. 1-20
1.2.4 Microscope Part (Motorized TIRF Illuminator Unit, LU4A, N-STORM, and Ti-E System)1-21
1.2.5 Microscope Part (Photo Activation Illuminator Unit and Ti-U System)............................. 1-22
1.3 Safety Labels and Openings ........................................................................................................ 1-23
1.3.1 Ti-U Microscope Body (with the TIRF Illuminator Unit).................................................... 1-24
1.3.2 Ti-E Microscope Body (with the Motorized TIRF Illuminator Unit) ................................... 1-25
1.3.3 Ti-U Microscope Body (with the TI-PAU Photo Activation Illuminator Unit)........................ 1-26
1.3.4 C-LU2 Two-laser Unit....................................................................................................... 1-27
1.3.5 C-LU3 Three-laser Unit.................................................................................................... 1-28
1.3.6 C-LU3EX Three-laser Unit EX ......................................................................................... 1-29
1.3.7 LU4A Four-laser Module A............................................................................................... 1-30
1.3.8 LU-LR Four-laser PS Rack .............................................................................................. 1-31
1.3.9 TI-LUSU Shutter Unit ....................................................................................................... 1-32
1.3.10 TI-LU4SU Shutter Unit LU4 ............................................................................................. 1-34
1.3.11 TI-TIRF TIRF Illuminator Unit........................................................................................... 1-36
1.3.12 TI-TIRF-E Motorized TIRF Illuminator Unit ― For Normal Microscopy
(Except N-STORM).......................................................................................................... 1-37
1.3.13 TI-TIRF-E Motorized TIRF Illuminator Unit ― For N-STORM Microscopy...................... 1-38
1.3.14 TI-PAU Photo Activation Illuminator Unit ......................................................................... 1-39
1.4 Name of Each Part ....................................................................................................................... 1-40
1.4.1 TIRF Illuminator Unit and Ti-U System ............................................................................ 1-40
1.4.2 Motorized TIRF Illuminator Unit and Ti-E System............................................................ 1-45
1.4.3 Motorized TIRF Illuminator Unit, LU4A, N-STORM and Ti-E System.............................. 1-49
1.4.4 TI-PAU Photo Activation Illuminator Unit and Ti-U System.............................................. 1-54
1.4.5 Laser Unit......................................................................................................................... 1-58
1.4.6 Laser Safety Kit................................................................................................................ 1-62
1.4.7 Related Product ............................................................................................................... 1-64
2. Preparations........................................................................................................................................ 1-67
2.1 Check Items and Tools ................................................................................................................. 1-67
2.1.1 Required Items................................................................................................................. 1-67
2.1.2 Tools................................................................................................................................. 1-68
2.2 Overview of Setup Procedure ...................................................................................................... 1-69
3. Setting Up the PC and Operation Software ..................................................................................... 1-70
1-1
Contents
4. Setting Up the Microscope ................................................................................................................ 1-71

4.1 List of Parts .................................................................................................................................. 1-71
4.2 Setup Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 1-74
4.2.1 Assembling Each Part and Attaching Them to the Microscope....................................... 1-74
4.2.2 Attaching the N-STORM Kit ............................................................................................. 1-85
4.2.3 Attaching the Laser Safety Kit.......................................................................................... 1-87
4.2.4 Attaching the Stage Up Kit ............................................................................................... 1-89
4.2.5 Attaching the Back Port Unit ............................................................................................ 1-92
5. Laser Unit ............................................................................................................................................ 1-93

5.1 Overview of the Laser Units ......................................................................................................... 1-94
5.1.1 AOM Controller (Optional) ............................................................................................. 1-100
5.1.2 LU-LR Four-laser PS Rack ............................................................................................ 1-101
5.2 C-LU2 Two-laser Unit, and C-LU3 Three-laser Unit .................................................................. 1-103
5.2.1 Preparation..................................................................................................................... 1-103
5.2.2 Laser Installation............................................................................................................ 1-104
5.2.3 Laser Rough Adjustment................................................................................................ 1-106
5.2.4 Final Adjustment for the Ar Laser Light with the Optical Fiber....................................... 1-113
5.2.5 Final Adjustment for the He-Ne Laser Light and 405 Laser Light
with the Optical Fiber ..................................................................................................... 1-119
5.2.6 Attaching the Sheet Metal Covers ................................................................................. 1-121
5.3 C-LU3EX Three-laser Unit EX ................................................................................................... 1-122
5.3.1 Preparation..................................................................................................................... 1-123
5.3.3 Laser Rough Adjustment 1............................................................................................. 1-128
5.3.6 Final Adjustment for the He-Ne Laser Light and 405 Laser Light
with the Optical Fiber ..................................................................................................... 1-152
5.3.7 Adjusting the AOM Controller (When the AOM Unit Used Only) ................................... 1-154
5.3.8 Attaching the Sheet Metal Cover ................................................................................... 1-155
5.4 LU4A Four-laser Module A ......................................................................................................... 1-156
5.4.1 Preparation..................................................................................................................... 1-157
5.4.6 Final Adjustment for Other Laser Light with the Optical Fiber ....................................... 1-194
5.4.7 Removing the AOTF Driver Remote Controller ............................................................. 1-196
5.4.8 Attaching the Sheet Metal Cover ................................................................................... 1-197
5.5 Setting Up the LU-LR Four-laser PS Rack ................................................................................ 1-198
5.5.1 System Description ........................................................................................................ 1-198
5.5.2 Mounting Laser Power Supply....................................................................................... 1-201
5.5.3 Details on Mounting Laser Supply ................................................................................. 1-207
1-2
Contents
6. Connection between the Laser Unit and the Microscope ............................................................ 1-213
6.1 Setting and Connecting the TI-LUSU Shutter Unit..................................................................... 1-213
6.1.1 Control System Selection............................................................................................... 1-214
6.1.2 Control Mode of the Shutter Unit ................................................................................... 1-214
6.1.3 Setting and Connecting the TI-LU4SU Shutter Unit LU4............................................... 1-215
6.1.4 DIP Switch Settings ....................................................................................................... 1-217
6.1.5 Communications Commands......................................................................................... 1-219
6.2 Attaching the Optical Fiber to the Light Source ......................................................................... 1-222
6.3 Replacement of Optical Path Switch Mirror ............................................................................... 1-224
6.4 Installing the N-STORM Kit ........................................................................................................ 1-226
7. Confirmation and Check Sheet ....................................................................................................... 1-228

7.1 Checking Procedure................................................................................................................... 1-228
7.2 Check Sheet............................................................................................................................... 1-229
8. Specifications and Performance..................................................................................................... 1-231

8.1 Overall Configuration ................................................................................................................. 1-231
8.1.1 TIRF Illuminator Unit / Motorized TIRF Illuminator Unit― Configuration for Normal
Microscopy (Except N-STORM)..................................................................................... 1-231
8.1.2 Motorized TIRF Illuminator Unit ― Configuration for N-STORM................................... 1-232
8.1.3 Photo Activation Illuminator Unit .................................................................................... 1-234
8.1.4 Mountable lasers............................................................................................................ 1-235
8.1.5 TI-LUSU Shutter Unit ..................................................................................................... 1-238
8.1.6 AC Adapter for the TI-LUSU Shutter Unit ...................................................................... 1-238
8.1.7 Power Cord for the AC Adapter of the TI-LUSU Shutter Unit ........................................ 1-238
8.2 Environmental Conditions .......................................................................................................... 1-239
8.2.1 Normal Microscopy (Except N-STORM)........................................................................ 1-239
8.2.2 N-STORM ...................................................................................................................... 1-239
8.3 Safety Standards Compliance.................................................................................................... 1-240
8.3.1 Normal Microscopy (Except N-STORM)........................................................................ 1-240
8.3.2 N-STORM ...................................................................................................................... 1-241
1-3
1 System Configurations and Part Names
1.1 Overview
1.1.1 TIRF Illuminator Unit and Ti-U System Overview
TIRF illuminator unit and Ti-U system overview (front view):

When used in combination with two-laser or three-laser unit
(Standard configuration to use the TIRF illuminator unit)
(1)
(4)
(2) (10) (12)
(8)
AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM
LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN
CAUTION – CLASS 3B
(3)
(5) (6) (13) (7) (9) (11)
Figure 1.1-1
* For details, see Section 8.1, “Overall Configuration,” in Chapter 8, “Specifications and Performance.”
(1) Power supply devices for the laser devices

(2) Laser unit (C-LU2, C-LU3, C-LU3EX)
(3) PC
(4) Optical fiber
(5) TI-LUSU shutter unit
(6) AC adapter for the shutter unit
(7) TV camera (video camera)
(8) TI-FLC epi-fl filter turret
(9) Power supply device for the diascopic illumination
(10) TIRF illuminator unit
(11) HG fiber light source
(12) Laser safety cover
(13) Interlock cable
1-4
Chapter 1 System Configurations and Part Names
1.1 Overview
TIRF illuminator unit and Ti-U system overview (top view):

(1)
(2)
(4) (10)
WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET

NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN

VORSICHT – LASERSTRAHLUNG
KLASSE 3B,
(13)
SER RADIATIO
OID EXPOSU
CLASS 3B LASE
AVOID EXPOSURE
LASER LIGHT IS EMITTE
FROM OBJECTIVE APERT
(12) (11)
(9)
(7) (8)
RS-232C LASER UNIT INPUT
12V
SAFETY
LASER SHUTTER COVER 1A
CLOSE
BINO
CLOSE
(3)
POWER
TI-LUSU
Exclusive use for TI-TIRF system

Don't use this unit with other systems.
(5) (6)
Figure 1.1-2

(3) PC
(4) Optical fiber
1-5
1.1 Overview
TIRF illuminator unit and Ti-U system overview (front view):

When used with four-laser module A
(1)
(4)
(2)
(13) (12)
L4 L3 L2 L1 POWER
(9) (11)
(7)
(5) (6)
(8) (10)
(3)
Figure 1.1-3

(2) Laser unit (LU4A)
(3) PC
(4) Optical fiber
(5) TI-LU4SU shutter unit LU4
(13) USB cable
1-6
1.1 Overview
TIRF illuminator unit and Ti-U system overview (top view):

(1)
(2)
(12) (9)
(13)
(4)


KLASSE 3B,
SER RADIATIO
OID EXPOSU
CLASS 3B LASE
AVOID EXPOSURE
(10)
(11) (8)
(6)
(3) TI-LU4SU
LASER
EMISSION
(7)
POWER
(5)
Figure 1.1-4

(3) PC
(4) Optical fiber
(13) USB cable
1-7
1.1 Overview
1.1.2 Motorized TIRF Illuminator Unit and Ti-E System Overview
Motorized TIRF illuminator unit and Ti-E system overview (front view):
(Standard configuration to use the motorized TIRF illuminator unit)
(1) (16)
(4)
(2) (11) (14)
(8)
(3) (5) (6) (15) (7) (13) (9) (12)
Figure 1.1-5

(3) PC
(4) Optical fiber
(8) TI-FLC-E/HQ motor epi-fl filter turret
(10) Hub controller A (with AC adapter)
(11) Motorized TIRF illuminator unit
(13) Remote control pad
(16) USB cable
1-8
1.1 Overview
Motorized TIRF illuminator unit and Ti-E system overview (top view):
(16)
(1)
(2) (15) (11) (10)
(4)
BEAM
THE BEAM
OPEN
WHEN OPEN
TOTHE
RADIATION WHEN
3B
CLASS 3B
EXPOSURETO
LASER RADIATION
AVOID EXPOSURE
CAUTION–
CAUTION –CLASS
LASER
AVOID
GEÖFFNET
ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET
BEAM
AUSSETZEN
THE BEAM
STRAHL AUSSETZEN
LASERSTRAHLUNG
OPEN
– LASERSTRAHLUNG
WHEN OPEN
TO THE
RADIATION WHEN
3B
CLASS 3B
EXPOSURE TO
WENN ABDECKUNG
DEM STRAHL
LASER RADIATION
AVOID EXPOSURE
– CLASS
VORSICHT –
3B,
KLASSE 3B,
NICHT DEM
CAUTION –
VORSICHT
CAUTION
KLASSE
LASER
AVOID
WENN
NICHT
(14)
SER RADIATIO
OID EXPOSU
CLASS 3B LASE
(12)
AVOID EXPOSURE
(9)
(7)
12V
(8)
(3)
SAFETY
CLOSE
BINO
CLOSE
POWER
TI-LUSU

(13)
(5) (6)
Figure 1.1-6

(3) PC
(4) Optical fiber
(16) USB cable
1-9
1.1 Overview
Motorized TIRF illuminator unit and Ti-E system overview (front view):
(1)
(4)
(2)
(15) (14)
L4 L3 L2 L1 POWER
(10) (13)
(7)
(15)
(5) (6) (12) (8) (11)
(3)
Figure 1.1-7

(3) PC
(4) Optical fiber
(15) USB cable
1-10
1.1 Overview
Motorized TIRF illuminator unit and Ti-E system overview (top view):
When used in combination with four-laser module A
(1)
(14)
(2)
(15) (10) (9)

(15)
(4)
BEAM
THE BEAM
OPEN
WHEN OPEN
TOTHE
RADIATION WHEN
3B
CLASS 3B
EXPOSURETO
LASER RADIATION
AVOID EXPOSURE
–CLASS
CAUTION –
CAUTION
LASER
AVOID
(11)
(8)
(6)
(3)
TI-LU4SU
LASER
EMISSION
POWER
(5) (7) (12)

Figure 1.1-8

(3) PC
(4) Optical fiber
(15) USB cable
1-11
1.1 Overview
1.1.3 Motorized TIRF Illuminator Unit, LU4A, N-STORM, and Ti-E System
Overview
Motorized TIRF illuminator unit, LU4A, N-STORM, and Ti-E system overview (front view)
(Standard configuration to use the Motorized TIRF illuminator unit)
(1)
(4)
(2)
(15) (14)
L4 L3 L2 L1 POWER
(19) (20) (10) (13)
(7)
(15)
(16) (18) (12) (8) (11)

(5) (6) (17)
(3)
Figure 1.1-9
(1) Power supply devices for the laser devices (14) Interlock cable
(2) Laser unit (LU4A) (15) USB cable
(3) PC (16) 3D-STORM port
(4) Optical fiber (17) DSC support columns (2 pieces)
(5) TI-LU4SU shutter unit LU4 (18) Ti-E fixing plate
(6) EM-CCD camera (19) STORM slider
(7) TI-FLC-E/HQ motor epi-fl filter turret (20) Lambda plate slider
(8) Power supply device for the diascopic (21) 405-nm laser adapter with ND
illumination (See Figure 1.1-10 for the location.)
(9) Hub controller A (with AC adapter) (22) 457-nm laser adapter with ND
(10) Motorized TIRF illuminator unit (See Figure 1.1-10 for the location.)
(11) HG fiber light source (23) 561-nm laser adapter with ND

(See Figure 1.1-10 for the location.)
1-12
1.1 Overview
Motorized TIRF illuminator unit, LU4A, N-STORM, and Ti-E system overview (top view)
(Standard configuration to use the Motorized TIRF illuminator unit)
(1)
(14)
(22) (2)
(21)
transportation.
Fix the laser unit with
four blocks during
(23)
(19) (15) (20) (10) (9)
(15) (4)
(11)
(8)
(6)
(3)
TI-LU4SU
LASER
EMISSION
POWER
(17)
(12)
(5) (16) (7) (13) (18)
Figure 1.1-10
(1) Power supply devices for the laser devices (13) Laser safety cover
(2) Laser unit (LU4A) (14) Interlock cable
(3) PC (15) USB cable
(4) Optical fiber (16) 3D-STORM port
(5) TI-LU4SU shutter unit LU4 (17) DSC support columns (2 pieces)
(6) EM-CCD camera (18) Ti-E fixing plate
(7) TI-FLC-E/HQ motor epi-fl filter turret (19) STORM slider
(8) Power supply device for the diascopic (20) Lambda plate slider
illumination (21) 405-nm laser adapter with ND
(9) Hub controller A (with AC adapter) (22) 457-nm laser adapter with ND
(10) Motorized TIRF illuminator unit (23) 561-nm laser adapter with ND
1-13
1.1 Overview
1.1.4 TI-PAU Photo Activation Illuminator Unit and Ti-U System Overview
Photo activation illuminator unit and Ti-U (front view):

(Standard configuration to use the photo activation illuminator unit)
(1)
(4)
(2)
(8)
(10) (11)
(7)
(3) (5) (6) (12) (9)
Figure 1.1-11

(3) PC
(4) Optical fiber
(9) Power supply device for dia illumination
(10) Photo activation illuminator unit
1-14
1.1 Overview
Photo activation illuminator unit and Ti-U (top view):

(1)
(2)
(4) (10)
CAUTION CLASS 3B
WENN ABDECKUNG GE FFNET


LASERSTRAHLUNG
CLASS 3B
KLASSE 3B,
VORSICHT
CAUTION
(12)
(7) LASER RADIATION
AVOID EXPOSURE TO BE
CLASS 3B LASER PROD
AVOID EXPOSURE
LASER LIGHT IS EMITTED
FROM OBJECTIVE APERTURE
RS-232C
LASER SHUTTER
LASER UNIT
SAFETY
COVER
CLOSE
INPUT
12V
1A
(8)
(6)
BINO
CLOSE
POWER
(3) Exclusive use for TI-TIRF system

TI-LUSU
(9) (11)
(5)
Figure 1.1-12

(3) PC
(4) Optical fiber
(9) Power supply device for dia illumination
1-15
1.1 Overview
Photo activation illuminator unit and Ti-U (front view):

(1)
(4)
(2)
(12) (11)
L4 L3 L2 L1 POWER
(9)
(7)
(5) (6) (8) (10)
(3)
Figure 1.1-13

(3) PC
(4) Optical fiber
(12) USB cable
1-16
1.1 Overview
Photo activation illuminator unit and Ti-U (top view):

(1)
(2)
(12)
(11) (9)
(4)


KLASSE 3B,
LASER RADIATION
CLASS 3B LASER PROD
AVOID EXPOSURE
(10)
(8)
(6)
(3) TI-LU4SU
LASER
EMISSION
POWER
(7)
(5)
Figure 1.1-14

(3) PC
(4) Optical fiber
(12) USB cable
1-17
1.2 Optical Paths of Lasers
1.2.1 Laser Unit

(2) (2) (3) (2) (1)
(3) (3) (4)
(2)
(1) (1) (1)
*1
*1 (11)
(11)
(5)
*1
(12)
(5)
(5) (5) (9)
(7)
(6) (6) (10)
(5)
(7) (8) (7) (8) (7) (8) (7) (8)
C-LU2 two-laser unit C-LU3 three-laser unit C-LU3EX three-laser unit EX LU4A four-laser module A
Figure 1.2-1
(1) Laser mounting position L1 (7) Laser coupling mirror

(See the table below.) (8) Laser outlet (single-mode optical fiber)
(2) Laser mounting position L2 (9) Wavelength selection filter
(See the table below.) (optional for C-LU3EX)
(3) Laser mounting position L3 (10) AOTF brightness adjustment part
(See the table below.)
(11)*1 ND filters (two ND32s)
(4) Laser mounting position L4
(See the table below.) (12)*1 ND filters (ND2 and ND4)
(5) Motorized shutters *1: Installed only when the N-STORM kit is
mounted
(6) ND filters (ND4 and ND8)
Table 1.2-1
Laser mounting position
Model name
L1 L2 L3 L4
C-LU2
405 nm to 514 nm 532 nm to 640 nm — —
two-laser unit
C-LU3 405 nm to 445 nm 532 nm to 561 nm

488 nm to 514 nm —
three-laser unit 594 nm to 645 nm 633 nm
C-LU3EX 405 nm to 445 nm 532 nm to 561 nm
488 nm to 514 nm —
three-laser unit EX 594 nm to 645 nm 633 nm
LU4A
630 nm to 650nm 400 nm to 445 nm 455 nm to 515 nm 540 nm to 595 nm
four-laser module A
LU4A
four-laser module A 635 nm to 648 nm 400 nm to 445 nm 455 nm to 515 nm 540 nm to 595 nm
(for N-STORM)
1-18
1.2.2 Microscope Part (TIRF Illuminator Unit and Ti-U System)
TIRF illuminator unit and Ti-U system (top view)
Laser light



KLASSE 3B,
SER RADIATIO
OID EXPOSU
CLASS 3B LASE
AVOID EXPOSURE

12V
SAFETY
CLOSE
BINO
CLOSE
POWER
TI-LUSU

Figure 1.2-2
TIRF Illuminator Unit and Ti-U System (front left view)
CAUTION
LASER – CLASS
AVOID RADIATIO 3B
EXPOSU N WHEN
RE TO OPEN
VORSICH THE BEAM
KLASSE T – LASERST
WENN 3B, RAHLUNG
NICHT ABDECKU
DEM NG
STRAHL GEÖFFNE
AUSSETZ T
EN
Laser safety cover
TIRF Illuminator Unit LASER

AVOID
RADIA
CLASS
TION
3B LASER
EXPO
TO BEAM
SURE PROD
UCT
D RE
SURE EMITTE
ISTIVE APERTU
EXPO
LIGHT
AVOID OBJEC
LASER
FROM
Optical fiber
Epi-fl filter turret
N
D
2 N
D N
8 D
16
Laser light
CAUTION
LASER – CLASS
AVOID RADIATIO 3B
EXPOSU N WHEN
RE TO OPEN
VORSICH THE BEAM
WENN 3B, RAHLUNG
NICHT ABDECKU
DEM NG
STRAHL GEÖFFNE
AUSSETZ T
EN
(from the laser unit) AVOID

LASER EXPO
FROM LIGHT ISSURE
THIS EMITTE
APERT
URE D CAUTION
LASER – CLASS
AVOID RADIATIO 3B
EXPOSU N WHEN
RE TO OPEN
Ti-U microscope body

VORSICH THE BEAM
WENN 3B, RAHLUNG
NICHT ABDECKU
DEM NG
STRAHL GEÖFFNE
AUSSETZ T
EN
ON
OFF
TV camera 6V30W
12V100
W
MAX.
Figure 1.2-3
Optical path
The TV camera can be installed in a side port (right or left port) or the bottom port (only for Ti-U/B). To
change the optical path, use the optical path selector knob on the microscope.
Note that the laser shutter automatically closes when the microscope optical path is changed to the eyepiece.
It is not possible to observe images obtained by irradiating the laser to the specimen, from the binocular part
of the microscope.
1-19
1.2.3 Microscope Part (Motorized TIRF Illuminator Unit and Ti-E System)
Motorized TIRF illuminator unit and Ti-E system (top view)
Laser light
BEAM
THE BEAM
OPEN
WHEN OPEN
TOTHE
RADIATIONWHEN
3B
CLASS 3B
EXPOSURETO
LASER RADIATION
AVOID EXPOSURE
CAUTION–
CAUTION –CLASS
LASER
AVOID
GEÖFFNET
ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET
BEAM
AUSSETZEN
THE BEAM
STRAHL AUSSETZEN
LASERSTRAHLUNG
OPEN
– LASERSTRAHLUNG
WHEN OPEN
TO THE
RADIATION WHEN
3B
CLASS 3B
EXPOSURE TO
WENN ABDECKUNG
DEM STRAHL
LASER RADIATION
AVOID EXPOSURE
– CLASS
VORSICHT –
3B,
KLASSE 3B,
NICHT DEM
CAUTION –
VORSICHT
CAUTION
KLASSE
LASER
AVOID
WENN
NICHT
SER RADIATIO
OID EXPOSU
CLASS 3B LASE
AVOID EXPOSURE

12V
SAFETY
CLOSE
BINO
CLOSE
POWER
TI-LUSU

Figure 1.2-4
Motorized TIRF illuminator unit and Ti-E system (front left view)
CAUTION
LASER – CLASS
AVOID RADIATIO 3B
EXPOSU N WHEN
RE TO OPEN
VORSICH THE BEAM
WENN 3B, RAHLUNG
NICHT ABDECKU
DEM NG
STRAHL GEÖFFNE
AUSSETZ T
EN
Laser safety cover
Motorized TIRF RADIA

TION TO BEAM
SURE PROD
3B LASER
EXPO
UCT
LASER
AVOID
CLASS
D RE
Illuminator Unit
SURE EMITTE
ISTIVE APERTU
EXPO
LIGHT
AVOID OBJEC
LASER
FROM
Optical fiber
N
D
2 N
D
8
N
D
16 Motorized epi-fl filter turret
Laser light
CAUTION
LASER – CLASS
AVOID RADIATIO 3B
EXPOSU N WHEN
RE TO OPEN
VORSICH THE BEAM
WENN 3B, RAHLUNG
NICHT ABDECKU
DEM NG
STRAHL GEÖFFN
AUSSETZ ET
EN
(from the laser unit) AVOID

LASER EXPO
FROM LIGHT ISSURE
THIS EMITTE
APERT
URE D CAUTION
LASER – CLASS
AVOID RADIATIO 3B
EXPOSU N WHEN
Ti-E microscope body

RE TO OPEN
VORSICH THE BEAM
WENN 3B, RAHLUNG
NICHT ABDECKU
DEM NG
STRAHL GEÖFFNE
AUSSETZ T
EN
Coarse
Fine
ExFine
SET
Z-RE
Obj. AY
DISPL
TV camera
NESS
BRIGHT
ON/O LL
FF FOCUS RECA
EYE RY
ON MEMO
6V30W
PFS
R100
12V100
W
L100
L80
MAX.
Figure 1.2-5
Optical path
The TV camera can be installed in a side port (right or left port) or the bottom port (only for Ti-E/B). To
change the optical path, use the optical path selector switch on the microscope.
Note that the laser shutter automatically closes when the microscope optical path is changed to the eyepiece.
It is not possible to observe images obtained by irradiating the laser to the specimen, from the binocular part
of the microscope.
1-20
1.2.4 Microscope Part (Motorized TIRF Illuminator Unit, LU4A, N-STORM, and
Ti-E System)
Motorized TIRF Illuminator Unit, LU4A, N-STORM, and Ti-E System (top view)
transportation.
four blocks during
Laser light

TI-LU4SU
LASER
EMISSION
POWER
Figure 1.2-6
Motorized TIRF Illuminator Unit, LU4A, N-STORM, and Ti-E System (front left view)
CAUTION
LASER – CLASS
AVOID RADIATION 3B
EXPOSUR WHEN
E TO OPEN
VORSICHT THE BEAM
KLASSE – LASERSTR
WENN 3B, AHLUNG
NICHT ABDECKU
DEM NG
STRAHL GEÖFFNE
AUSSETZE T
N
Motorized TIRF
Illuminator Unit Laser safety cover
CT
ION TO BEAM
URE PRODU
RADIAT
LASER 3B LASER
EXPOS
AVOID
CLASS
RE
UREEMITTED
IS IVE APERTU
EXPOS
STORM slider
LIGHT
OBJECT
AVOID
LASER
FROM
Optical fiber
CAUTION
LASER – CLASS
AVOID RADIATION 3B
VORSICHT
EXPOSUR WHEN
KLASSE – LASERSTR
E TO
THE
OPEN
BEAM
Motorized Epi-fl Filter Turret
Laser light
WENN 3B, AHLUNG
NICHT ABDECKU
DEM NG
STRAHL GEÖFFNE
AUSSETZE T
N
AVOID
LASER EXPOS
FROM LIGHT IS URE
THIS EMITTE
APERTU D
(from the laser unit)

RE CAUTION

LASER – CLASS
AVOID RADIATION 3B
EXPOSUR WHEN
E TO OPEN
VORSICHT THE BEAM
KLASSE – LASERSTR
WENN 3B, AHLUNG
NICHT ABDECKU
DEM NG
STRAHL GEÖFFNE
AUSSETZE T
N
3D-STORM port
EM-CCD camera
Figure 1.2-7
The 3D-STORM port can be installed in a side port (right or left port). To change the optical path, use the
optical path selector switch on the microscope.
Note that the laser shutter automatically closes when the microscope optical path is changed to the
eyepiece. It is not possible to observe images obtained by irradiating the laser to the specimen, from the
binocular part of the microscope.
1-21
1.2.5 Microscope Part (Photo Activation Illuminator Unit and Ti-U System)
TI-PAU photo activation illuminator unit and Ti-U system (top view)
Laser light

CAUTION CLASS 3B
WENN ABDECKUNG GE FFNET

LASERSTRAHLUNG
CLASS 3B
KLASSE 3B,
VORSICHT
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
CLASS 3B LASER PROD
AVOID EXPOSURE

12V
SAFETY
CLOSE
BINO
CLOSE
POWER
TI-LUSU

Figure 1.2-8
TI-PAU photo activation illuminator unit and Ti-U system
CAUTION
LASER – CLASS
AVOID RADIATIO 3B
EXPOSU N WHEN
RE TO OPEN
VORSICH THE BEAM
WENN 3B, RAHLUN
NICHT ABDECK G
DEM UNG
STRAHL GEÖFFN
AUSSETZ ET
EN
Laser safety cover

Motorized TIRF
Illuminator Unit
TION TO BEAM
UCT
SURER PROD
R RADIA
EXPO LASE
LASE
AVOID S 3B
CLAS
D URE
SURE EMITTE
ISTIVE APERT
EXPO
LIGHT
AVOID OBJEC
LASER
FROM
Optical fiber
N N
Motorized epi-fl filter turret

N D
D D
8 16
2
Laser light CAUTION

LASER – CLASS

AVOID RADIATIO 3B
EXPOSU N WHEN
RE TO OPEN
VORSICH THE BEAM
WENN 3B, RAHLUN
NICHT ABDECK G
DEM UNG
STRAHL GEÖFFN
AUSSETZ ET
EN
AVOID
LASER EXPO
FROM LIGHT ISSURE
THIS EMITT
APERT ED
URE CAUTION
LASER – CLASS
AVOID RADIATIO 3B
EXPOSU N WHEN
RE TO OPEN
VORSICH THE BEAM

WENN 3B, RAHLUN
NICHT ABDECK G
DEM UNG
STRAHL GEÖFFN
AUSSETZ ET
EN
ON
TV camera
OFF
6V30W
12V100
W
MAX.
Figure 1.2-9
1-22
1.3 Safety Labels and Openings
The following shows the types and locations of the safety labels affixed to each unit picture, as well as the
openings provided in the product. The labels to be affixed to the microscope are shipped with the TIRF
illuminator unit/motorized TIRF illuminator unit/photo activation illuminator unit, and the laser safety kit. Affix
these labels in place when setting up TIRF-PAU. The other labels are already affixed in place when
shipped.
(1) IEC warning label - (2) IEC explanatory label - (3) Model name and serial
laser hazard symbol Class 3B laser product number label
TI-TIRF
LASER RADIATION
TI-TIRF-E TI-PAU (4) Safety standard label

TI-LUSU/TI-LU4SU
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian

ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est confir me
à la nor me NMB-003 du Canada.
MADE IN JAPAN
(5) IEC caution label - (6) IEC caution label - (7) IEC caution label -
Class 3B area Class 3B area Class 3B area
CAUTION – CLASS 3B CAUTION – CLASS 3B
LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN CAUTION – CLASS 3B
LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN
AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM VORSICHT – LASERSTRAHLUNG KLASSE 3B, AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT – LASERSTRAHLUNG KLASSE 3B,
KLASSE 3B, WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET
WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN
(8) IEC aperture label 1 (9) IEC aperture label 2 (10) TI-TIRF special label
TI-PAU special label
AVOID EXPOSURE AVOID EXPOSURE
LASER LIGHT IS EMITTED LASER LIGHT IS EMITTED Exclusive use for TI-TIRF system
FROM OBJECTIVE APERTURE FROM THIS APERTURE
(11) Caution label (12) IEC caution label - Class 4

area Exclusive use for TI-PAU system
1-23
1.3.1 Ti-U Microscope Body (with the TIRF Illuminator Unit)
Be sure to affix each label to the positions indicated in the figure below.
The microscope body has three openings, A to C, as shown below. Near each of the openings, affix the
following labels at the positions shown below.
(1) IEC warning label - (2) IEC explanatory label - (7) IEC caution label -
laser hazard symbol Class 3B laser product Class 3B area
LASER RADIATION LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN
AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM
KLASSE 3B,
(8) IEC aperture label 1 (9) IEC aperture label 2

LASER LIGHT IS EMITTED LASER LIGHT IS EMITTED
CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
AVOID EXPOSURE WHEN OPEN
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
KLASSE – LASERSTRAHLUNG
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
(7)
(1)
(8)
(2)
OD AM
T
UC
R PR BE
LASE RE TO
S 3B POSU N
CLAS EX DIATIO
RE
RTU
E APETED
AVOIDR RA
JEC IS EMRE
TIV IT
LASE
M OB HT SU
FRO ER LIG PO
LAS EX
AVOID
CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
KLASSE – LASERSTRA
3B, HLUNG
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
AVOID EXPOS
LASER LIGHT URE
FROM THIS IS EMITTED
APERTUR CAUTION
– CLASS
E LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
ON
OFF
(7)
6V30W
B
12V100W
MAX.
(9) (both sides) (7) (both sides)

C
Figure 1.3-1
1-24
1.3.2 Ti-E Microscope Body (with the Motorized TIRF Illuminator Unit)
KLASSE 3B,

CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
(7)
(1)
(8)
(2)
OD AM
T
UC
R PR BE
LASE RE TO
S 3B POSU N
CLAS EX DIATIO
RE
AVOIDR RA
IVE ITTED
RTU
RE
APE
LASE
ECT IS EM
M OBJ HT SU
FRO ER LIG PO
EX
LASOID
AV
CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B, HLUNG
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
AVOID EXPOS
LASER LIGHT URE
APERTUR CAUTION
– CLASS
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
T
ESE
Z-R
Coarse
Fine
ExFine PLAY
DIS
SS LL
NE
IGHT RECA
BR
RY
Obj. CU
S MO
ME S
FO E PF
EY ON
ON/OFF
00
R1
6V30W
(7) 12V100W
L100
B MAX.
L80

C
Figure 1.3-2
1-25
1.3.3 Ti-U Microscope Body (with the TI-PAU Photo Activation Illuminator Unit)
KLASSE 3B,

CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
(7)
(1)
(8)
(2)
OD AM
T
UC
R PR BE
LASE RE TO
S 3B POSU N
CLAS EX DIATIO
RE
RTU
E APETED
AVOIDR RA
JEC IS EMRE
TIV IT
LASE
M OB HT SU
FRO ER LIG PO
LAS EX
AVOID
CAUTION
CAUTION– CLASS
LASER – CLASS 3B
LASER RADIATION
AVOID 3B
RADIATIONWHEN
AVOID EXPOSURE
EXPOSURETO WHENOPEN
THE OPEN
VORSICHT TO THEBEAM
BEAM
VORSICHT
WENN 3B, HLUNG
ABDECKUN
NICHT 3B, HLUNG
G GEÖFFNET
WENN DEM STRAHL
ABDECKUNG AUSSETZEN
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
AVOID EXPOS
LASER LIGHT URE
APERTUR CAUTION
– CLASS
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
ON
OFF
6V30W
(7)
12V100W
B MAX.

C
Figure 1.3-3
1-26
1.3.4 C-LU2 Two-laser Unit
Make sure that the labels are affixed in place.
(1) IEC warning label - (6) IEC caution label -

laser hazard symbol Class 3B area
(6)
(1)
Figure 1.3-4
1-27
1.3.5 C-LU3 Three-laser Unit

(6)
(1)
Figure 1.3-5
1-28
1.3.6 C-LU3EX Three-laser Unit EX

(6)
(1)
Figure 1.3-6
1-29
1.3.7 LU4A Four-laser Module A
(1) IEC warning label - (12) IEC caution label - Class 4

laser hazard symbol area
(12)* (1)
Figure 1.3-7
* For the laser path inside the laser unit, see Section 1.2.1, “Laser Unit.”
1-30
1.3.8 LU-LR Four-laser PS Rack
Make sure that the label is affixed in place.
(11) Caution label
(Front view)
(11)
(Rear view)
Figure 1.3-8
1-31
1.3.9 TI-LUSU Shutter Unit
For the TIRF illuminator unit or the motorized TIRF illuminator unit
(4) Safety standard label (10) TI-TIRF special label

conditions:
and
operation.

ICES-003.
MADE IN JAPAN

12V
SAFETY
CLOSE
BINO
CLOSE
POWER
TI-LUSU
(10)

(Top view)



(4)
MADE IN JAPAN
operation.
conditions:
ICES-003.
and
(Bottom view)
Figure 1.3-9
1-32
For the photo activation illuminator unit

(4) Safety standard label (10) TI-PAU special label
Exclusive use for TI-PAU system

conditions:
and
operation.

ICES-003.
MADE IN JAPAN

12V
SAFETY
CLOSE
BINO
CLOSE
ON
POWER
OFF
TI-LUSU
(10)
Exclusive use for TI-PAU system

(Top view)



(4)
MADE IN JAPAN
operation.
conditions:
ICES-003.
and
(Bottom view)
Figure 1.3-10
1-33
1.3.10 TI-LU4SU Shutter Unit LU4
For the TIRF illuminator unit or the motorized TIRF illuminator unit
(4) Safety standard label

conditions:
and
operation.

ICES-003.
MADE IN JAPAN
TI-LU4SU
LASER
EMISSION
POWER
(Top view)
( 2 ) t h i s d ev i c e mu s t a c c e p t a ny i n t e r fe r e n c e r e c e i ve d ,
i n c lu d i n g i n t e r fe r e n c e t h a t m ay c a use u n d e s i r e d
( 1 ) t h i s d ev i c e m ay n o t c au s e h a r m fu l i n t e r fer e n c e,

T h i s d ev i c e c o m p l i e s w i t h Pa r t 1 5 o f t h e F C C Ru l e s.
(4)
O p e ra t i o n i s s ub j e c t t o t h e fol l ow ing t wo
MADE IN JAPAN
o p e ra t i o n .
conditions:
ICES-003.
and
(Bottom view)
Figure 1.3-11
1-34
For the photo activation illuminator unit

(4) Safety standard label

conditions:
and
operation.

ICES-003.
MADE IN JAPAN
TI-LU4SU
LASER
EMISSION
POWER
(Top view)
( 2 ) t h i s d ev i c e mu s t a c c e p t a ny i n t e r fe r e n c e r e c e i ve d ,
i n c lu d i n g i n t e r fe r e n c e t h a t m ay c a us e u n d e s i r e d
( 1 ) t h i s d ev i c e m ay n o t c au s e h a r m fu l i n t e r fer e n c e,

This dev i c e c o m p l i e s w i t h Pa r t 1 5 o f t h e F C C Ru l e s.
(4)
O p e ra t i o n i s s ub j e c t t o t h e fol l ow ing t wo
MADE IN JAPAN
o p e ra t i o n .
conditions:
ICES-003.
and
(Bottom view)
Figure 1.3-12
1-35
1.3.11 TI-TIRF TIRF Illuminator Unit

This system has four openings, A to D, as shown below. Make sure that the following labels are affixed near
each of the openings.
(3) Model name and serial (5) IEC caution label - (7) IEC caution label -
number label Class 3B area Class 3B area
(3)
(7)
(7)
LA D EX SERS ÖF ZEN
CA R RA POSU TRAH ET
FN
NG
– LA G GESSET
3B OP AM
LU
EN
S N BE
ICHT , UN AU
AS WHE E
N TH
RS 3B CK HL
VO ASSE ABDESTRA
– CL IO TO
(5)
ION DIAT RE
KL N M
WEN T DE
NICH
OI
SE
UT
AV
CA R PO
LA D EX SE
AV
UT RA SU
SE
OI
ION DIAT RE
VO ASSE ABDE STRA
KL N M
WEN T DE
RS 3B CK HL
NICH
– CL IO TO
ICHT , UN AU
AS WHETHE
– LA G SSET
S N BE
N
3B OP AM
RS ÖFFN N
TR
AH ET
GE ZE
EN
LU
FILTER
NG
ND8
E TO THE BEAM
ND4
CAUTION – CLASS WHEN OPEN
N
3B
D
LASER RADIATION
AVOID EXPOSUR
A. S. 8
N
N
D D
2 N 4
D N
8 D
16
CA
UT
LAS ION
ER
AVO RAD – CL
ID EXP IATI ASS
OSU ON WH 3B
VO RE EN
RSI
KLA TO OPE
CH
WE SSE
T–
THE N
NN
NIC
3BLAS
BEA
HT ABD
DEM , ERS
ECK
M
STR
UNG TRA
AHL
HLU
GEÖ
AUS NG
SET FFN
ET
ZEN
D
(7)
A C
Figure 1.3-13
1-36
1.3.12 TI-TIRF-E Motorized TIRF Illuminator Unit ― For Normal Microscopy

(Except N-STORM)

(3)
Back view
(7) (7)
(7)
(5)
(7) D
B
A C
Figure 1.3-14
1-37
1.3.13 TI-TIRF-E Motorized TIRF Illuminator Unit ― For N-STORM Microscopy

(3)
Back view
(7) (7)
(7)
(5)
(7) D
B
A C
Figure 1.3-15
1-38
1.3.14 TI-PAU Photo Activation Illuminator Unit

(3)
(7)
Back
(7)
(5)
LA D EX SERS ÖF ZEN
CA R RA POSU TRAH ET
FN
NG
– LA G GESSET
3B OP AM
LU
EN
S N BE
ICHT , UN AU
AS WHE E
N TH
RS 3B CK HL
VO ASSE ABDESTRA
– CL IO TO
ION DIAT RE
KL N M
WEN T DE
NICH
OI
SE
UT
AV
D
TO THE BEAM
WHEN OPEN
CA R PO
LA D EX SE
AV
UT RA SU
SE
OI
ION DIAT RE
VO ASSE ABDE STRA
KL N M
WEN T DE
RS 3B CK HL
NICH
– CL IO TO
ICHT , UN AU
AS WHETHE
– LA G SSET
S N BE
N
3B OP AM
3B
RS ÖFFN N
TR
AH ET
GE ZE
EN
AVOID EXPOSURE
LASER RADIATION
LU
CAUTION – CLASS
FILTER
NG
ND8
ND4
N
IN
IN
D
A. S. 8
ND
2
N
N D
N N 4
D D
D 16
2 8
CA
UT
LAS ION
ER
AVO RAD – CLA
ID EXP IATI SS
OSU ON WH 3B
VO RE EN
RSI
KLA TO OPE
WEN
CH
SSET THE N
NIC
– LAS BEA
M
N
HT 3B,
ABD
DEM
ECK
ERS
STR
UNG TRA
AHL
HLU
GEÖ
AUS NG
FFN
SET
ET
ZEN
(7)
B C
A
Figure 1.3-16
1-39
1.4 Name of Each Part
1.4.1 TIRF Illuminator Unit and Ti-U System

When used with two-laser or three laser-unit
TIRF illuminator unit Filter slider cover (part of laser safety kit)
TI-FLC epi-fl filter turret

To laser unit


KLASSE 3B,
Laser safety cover
SER RADIATIO
OID EXPOSU
CLASS 3B LASE
AVOID EXPOSURE
To PC
TV camera (video camera)
TI-LUSU RS-232C
LASER SHUTTER
LASER UNIT
SAFETY
COVER
INPUT
12V
1A
shutter unit
CLOSE
HG fiber light source

BINO
CLOSE
POWER
TI-LUSU

Power supply device for the

Filter cube port cover retaining diascopic illumination
plate (part of laser safety kit)
Optical path selector knob
Figure 1.4-1
TIRF illuminator unit

To laser unit
Power supply device for the
diascopic illumination
To laser unit

KLASSE 3B,
Filter slider cover

(part of laser safety kit)
To laser unit SER RADIATIO

OID EXPOSU
CLASS 3B LASE
AVOID EXPOSURE
To PC
TI-LU4SU
LASER
EMISSION
POWER
TI-LU4SU shutter unit LU4 Laser safety cover
Filter cube port cover retaining

plate Optical path selector knob
(part of laser safety plate)
Figure 1.4-2
1-40
TI-TIRF illuminator unit
(7) Condenser lens locking screw (6) Focal point adjustment knob (12) ND filter slider
(3) Laser position adjustment knob (4) ND filter sliders

(14) Connector for the
RS FF N
CA R RA POSU TR NET
LA GE ETZE
NG
S EN BEAM
LU
G SS
EN
AH
ICHT , UN AU
3B OP
E
CL N WH TH
RS 3B CK HL
VO ASSE ABDESTRA
TIO TO
LA D EX SE
(for forward and backward
ION RE
KL NN M
AS
WE HT DE
UT DIA
NIC
OI
SE
AV
HG fiber light
adjustment) source adapter
CA R PO RSTR NE
LA D EX LASE
AV
UT RA SU
SE
OI
ION DIA RE AHLU

VO ASSE ABDE STRA
KL NN M
WE HT DE
RS 3B CK HL
NIC
ICHT , UN AU
CL N WH TH
AS
TIO TO
S EN BE
3B OP AM
G SS
E
GE ETZE
EN
FILTER
FF N
NG
T
ND8
ND4
N
D
A. S. 8
N
N
D D
2 N 4
D N
8 D
(1) Optical fiber

16
CAU
LAS TION
VOR
ER
AVO RAD CLA
ID EXP IATIO SS
KLASICH
WENSSET
OSU N WHE 3B
RE N
TO OPE
THE N
(13) Excitation filter slider
NICH
N
3B,LAS
BEA
T ABD
ECK ERS
DEM
M
STRA
UNG TRA
HL HLU
GE
AUS
NG
FFNE
SETZ
T
EN
(10) Aperture diaphragm

(2) Laser position adjustment knob centering screws
(for right and left adjustment)
(8) Field diaphragm centering screws open/close lever
(9) Field diaphragm open/close lever (5) Mirror switching lever

Push in: TIRF (60%) and Epi (40%)
Pull out: TIRF (100%)
Figure 1.4-3
Parts used in the TIRF microscopy operation Parts used in the epi-fl microscopy operation
(1) Optical fiber (8) Field diaphragm centering screws
(2) Laser position adjustment knob (9) Field diaphragm open/close lever
(for right and left adjustment) (10) Aperture diaphragm centering screws
(3) Laser position adjustment knob (11) Aperture diaphragm open/close lever
(for forward and backward adjustment)
(12) ND filter sliders
(5) Mirror switching lever
Push in: TIRF (60%) and Epi (40%) (14) Connector for the HG fiber light source
Pull out: TIRF (100%) adapter
(6) Focal point adjustment knob
(7) Condenser lens locking screw
1-41
Laser safety cover

The laser safety cover prevents laser light from
leaking. If the laser safety cover is not attached, the
motorized shutters of the laser unit do not open.
CAUTION
VORSICHT
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
Upper cover
Laser safety cover
Body
DUC M
T
BEA
LAS TO
PRO
CLA ID EXP IATION
3B RE
ER
SS OSU
TURE
AVO ER RAD
E APERTED
Safety interlock (both sides)

OBJE T IS RE
CTIV EMIT
FROMR LIGH OSU
LAS
LASE ID EXP
AVO
Figure 1.4-5
* If the safety interlock part is touched or gotten wet,
misoperation may occur.
CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
AVOID EXPOSURE
LASER LIGHT
APERTURE CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM GEÖFFNET
STRAHL
AUSSETZEN
ON
OFF
6V30W
12V100W
MAX.
Figure 1.4-4
Laser safety kit
The laser safety kit is composed of the filter slider

Filter slider cover
cover, protection plate, filter cube port fixed plate, and
safety labels.
Before using the product, check that the part shown
in the left figure is attached.
CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
* For the types and positions of safety labels, see

Section 1.3.1, “Ti-U Microscope Body.”
DUC M
T
BEA
LAS TO
PRO
CLA ID EXP IATION
3B RE
ER
SS OSU
TURE
AVO ER RAD
E APERTED
OBJE T IS RE
CTIV EMIT
FROMR LIGH OSU
LAS
LASE ID EXP
AVO
CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
AVOID EXPOSURE
LASER LIGHT
APERTURE CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
ON
OFF
6V30W
12V100W
MAX.
Protection plate Filter cube port cover

(for nosepiece) retaining plate
Figure 1.4-6
1-42

Filter cube port TI-FLC epi-fl The epi-fl filter turret is used to select an excitation
(and its cover) filter turret method by rotating the turret to change filter cubes
including a dichroic mirror.
Front
Filter cube address and Shutter lever

name on the optical path (O: open, C: close)
Filter cube rotation control
Figure 1.4-7
TI-LUSU shutter unit

Safety cover signal connector Eyepiece optical path The shutter unit controls motorized shutters in the
signal connector
Laser unit connector laser unit.
AC adapter
Serial IF connector connector Use this unit in combination with the C-LU2, C-LU3 or
Safety cover C-LU3EX laser unit.
12V
close lamp
SAFETY
CLOSE
Eyepiece optical
BINO
CLOSE path closed lamp
POWER
Power switch
Laser shutter TI-LUSU
switch / indicator Exclusive use for TI-TIRF system Power lamp

Figure 1.4-8
TI-LU4SU shutter unit LU4
Laser unit connector

The shutter unit controls motorized shutters in the
Indicator lamp laser unit.
Use this unit in combination with the LU4A laser
TI-LU4SU
Option switch unit.
LASER
EMISSION
If the safety interlock functions, all the shutters are
POWER closed, and the lamp turns off.
Power lamp To unlock the safety interlock, solve what caused
the safety interlock being locked, then cancel the
Laser shutter safety interlock from the software.
switch
Figure 1.4-9
1-43
Optical path selector knob (on the microscope body)

The laser shutter does not open when the eyepiece
route of the optical path (“EYE”) is selected.
PORT
Ti-U *
EYE Observation port 100%
PORT dial R Right port 100%
(optical path selector knob)
AUX Auxiliary port
(Observation/left port = 20:80)
Figure 1.4-10 (Observation/right port = 20:80)
L Left port 100%
Ti-U/B
R Right port 100%
B Bottom port 100%
L Left port 100%
* The Ti-U is also available with an optical-path

splitter prism preinstalled at the auxiliary port. The
light intensity ratio of visual observation to left port
is 20 to 80.
In this case, set the optical path selector knob as
follows:
R Right port 100%
L80 Visual observation/left port = 20:80
L Left port 100%
1-44
1.4.2 Motorized TIRF Illuminator Unit and Ti-E System
Motorized TIRF illuminator unit Filter slider cover

TI-FLC-E or TI-FLC-E/HQ
motorized epi-fl filter turret, with
BEAM
THE BEAM
OPEN
WHEN OPEN
TOTHE
RADIATIONWHEN
3B
CLASS 3B
EXPOSURETO
LASER RADIATION
Protection plate (part of laser safety kit)
AVOID EXPOSURE
–CLASS
CAUTION –
CAUTION
LASER
AVOID
To laser unit
GEÖFFNET
ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET
BEAM
AUSSETZEN
THE BEAM
STRAHL AUSSETZEN
LASERSTRAHLUNG
OPEN
– LASERSTRAHLUNG
WHEN OPEN
TO THE
RADIATION WHEN
3B
CLASS 3B
EXPOSURE TO
WENN ABDECKUNG
DEM STRAHL
LASER RADIATION
AVOID EXPOSURE
– CLASS
VORSICHT –
3B,
KLASSE 3B,
NICHT DEM
CAUTION –
VORSICHT
CAUTION
KLASSE
LASER
AVOID
WENN
NICHT
Laser safety cover
SER RADIATIO
OID EXPOSU
CLASS 3B LASE
AVOID EXPOSURE
To PC
TI-LUSU RS-232C
LASER SHUTTER
LASER UNIT
SAFETY
COVER
CLOSE
INPUT
12V
1A
shutter unit
BINO
CLOSE
POWER
TI-LUSU


.
Filter cube port cover retaining Power supply device for
plate the diascopic illumination
TI-RCP remote control pad
Optical path selector switch
(front panel)
Figure 1.4-11

Motorized TIRF illuminator
unit
Hub controller A
To laser unit (with AC adapter)
Power supply device for

the diascopic illumination
BEAM
THE BEAM
OPEN
WHEN OPEN
TOTHE
RADIATION WHEN
3B
CLASS 3B
EXPOSURETO
LASER RADIATION
AVOID EXPOSURE
–CLASS
CAUTION –
CAUTION
LASER
AVOID
To laser unit
To PC
To laser unit
To PC

TI-LU4SU
LASER
EMISSION
TI-LU4SU shutter unit LU4 POWER
Filter cube port cover Remote control pad

retaining plate
TI-FLC-E/HQ motor epi-fl

filter turret, Figure 1.4-12
with protection plate
1-45
TI-TIRF-E motorized illuminator unit and remote control pad
(5) Condenser lens locking screw (4) Focal point adjustment knob (10) ND filter sliders
(2) Laser position adjustment knob
(for forward and backward (12) Connector for the
adjustment) HG fiber light
TR ET
LA EX SERS FN N
S 3B EN AM
GE ETZE
ION TIO TO NG
EN
AS WH E BE
LU
ÖF
OP
G SS
AH
– CL N TH
RS 3B CKUN AU
VO SE DE RAHL
UT DIA RE
OID LA
KLASNN ABM ST
CA R RAPOSU
–
ICHT ,
WE HT DE
NIC
SE
AV
source adapter
CA ER RAPOSU
LAS ID EX
AVO – LAS GE TZE
VO SSE EC AH
UTI DIA RE AHLUN

KLANN ABDM STR
WE HT DE
NIC
RS 3B KU L
ON TIO TO
ICHT , NG AU
– CLA N TH G
SS WHEN E BE
3B OP AM
ER ÖFFNEN
STR
SSE
EN
T
(1) Optical fiber (11) Excitation filter slider
CA
LAS UTION
AVO ER RAD – CLA
ID EXP IATI
ON SS
OSU WH 3B
VOR
SIC RE EN
TO OPE

WEN
NICH
HT
–
THE N
N
TABD LAS BEA
ECK ERS
DEM
M
UNG TRA
STR
HLU
AHL
GEÖ
FFN
NG
AUS
SET
ET
ZEN
centering screws
(6) Field diaphragm centering screws open/close lever
(7) Field diaphragm open/close lever
Figure 1.4-13
(for forward and backward adjustment *) (8) Aperture diaphragm centering screws
(3) ND filter sliders (9) Aperture diaphragm open/close lever
(4) Focal point adjustment knob (10) ND filter sliders
(5) Condenser lens locking screw (11) Excitation filter slider
(12) Connector for the HG fiber light source
adapter
The TI-RCP remote control pad (or TI-ERGC ergo controller) allows users to change illumination to TIRF
or episcopic as well as adjust the laser right or left (TIRF illumination angle adjustment).
User can perform the following for the TI-TIRF-E

the remote control pad:
• TIRF/EPI button:
The illumination is changed to TIRF (laser light)
or episcopic.
• TIRF Angle button:
TIRF illumination position (illumination angle)
adjustment *
* The laser is adjusted right or left and the
TIRF Angle button TIRF / EPI button illumination angle of TIRF illumination (total
reflection illumination) is adjusted.
Figure 1.4-14
1-46
Laser safety cover
The laser safety cover prevents laser light from

leaking. If the laser safety cover is not attached, the
motorized shutters of the laser unit do not open.
CAUTION
VORSICHT
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
Upper cover
Laser safety cover
Body
DUC M
T
BEA
LAS TO
PRO
CLA ID EXP IATION
3B RE
ER
SS OSU
TURE
AVO ER RAD
E APERTED
OBJE T IS RE
CTIV EMIT

FROMR LIGH OSU
LAS
LASE EXP
ID
AVO
Figure 1.4-16
CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
* If the safety interlock part is touched or gotten wet,
misoperation may occur.
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
AVOID EXPOSURE
LASER LIGHT
APERTURE CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
SET
Z-RE
Coarse
Fine
ExFine LAY
DISP
S
NES ALL
GHT REC
BRI
ORY
Obj. US MEM
FOC PFS
EYE ON
ON / OFF
0
R10
6V30W
0
L10
12V100W
L80
MAX.
Figure 1.4-15
Laser safety kit
Filter slider cover

cover, protection plate, filter cube port fixed plate, and
safety labels.
Before using the product, check that the part shown
in the left figure is attached.
CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN

Section 1.3.2, “Ti-E Microscope Body.”
DUC M
T
BEA
LAS TO
PRO
CLA ID EXP IATION
3B RE
ER
SS OSU
TURE
AVO ER RAD
E APERTED
OBJE T IS RE
CTIV EMIT
FROMR LIGH OSU
LAS
LASE EXP
ID
AVO
CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
AVOID EXPOSURE
LASER LIGHT
APERTURE CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
SET
Z-RE
Coarse
Fine
ExFine LAY
DISP
S
NES ALL
GHT REC
BRI
ORY
Obj. US MEM
FOC PFS
EYE ON
ON / OFF
0
R10
6V30W
0
L10
12V100W
L80
MAX.

Figure 1.4-17
1-47
TI-FLC-E motorized epi-fl filter turret or TI-FLC-E/HQ motor epi-fl filter turret
TI-FLC-E motorized epi-fl The epi-fl filter turret is used to select an excitation
Filter cube port filter turret or TI-FLC-E/HQ method by rotating the turret to change filter cubes
(and its cover) motorized epi-fl filter turret including a dichroic mirror.
Front
Shutter lever (O: open, C: close)
Figure 1.4-18
signal connector
AC adapter
12V
close lamp
SAFETY
CLOSE
Eyepiece optical
BINO
CLOSE
path closed lamp
POWER
Power switch
switch / indicator Exclusive use for TI-TIRF system Power lamp

Figure 1.4-19

Use this unit in combination with the LU4A laser unit.
TI-LU4SU
Option switch If the safety interlock functions, all the shutters are
LASER
EMISSION
closed, and the lamp turns off.
POWER
To unlock the safety interlock, solve what caused the
Power lamp safety interlock being locked, then cancel the safety
interlock from the software.
Laser shutter
switch
Figure 1.4-20
1-48
Optical path selector switch (on the microscope body)
The laser shutter does not open when the nosepiece

tube route of the optical path (“EYE”) is selected.
Coarse
Ti-E Ti-E/B
Fine
ExFine
BRIGHT
NESS
FOCUS tter
DISP
LAY Epi Shu
Z-RESET

EYE
L100
ON
MEM
ORY
PFS
FL Bloc
k
L100 Left port 100% L100 Left port 100%
s
R100 Refocu
L80 Left port 80% L80 Left port 80%

L80
1.5X
1X
Escape
and observation port 20% and observation port 20%

R100 Right port 100% B100 Bottom port 100%
Figure 1.4-21
1.4.3 Motorized TIRF Illuminator Unit, LU4A, N-STORM and Ti-E System

Motorized TIRF illuminator
unit
Hub controller A
To laser unit (with AC adapter)
Power supply device for

the diascopic illumination
BEAM
THE BEAM
OPEN
WHEN OPEN
TOTHE
RADIATION WHEN
3B
CLASS 3B
EXPOSURETO
LASER RADIATION
AVOID EXPOSURE
–CLASS
To laser unit
CAUTION–
CAUTION
LASER
AVOID

STORM slider
To PC
To laser unit
To PC
EM-CCD camera
TI-LU4SU
LASER
EMISSION
TI-LU4SU shutter unit LU4 POWER
Remote control pad

3D-STORM port
TI-FLC-E/HQ motor epi-fl
Filter cube cover retaining filter turret,
plate with protection plate
Figure 1.4-22
1-49
TI-TIRF-E motorized illuminator unit
(5) Condenser lens locking screw

(6) STORM slider (4) Focal point adjustment knob
(2) Laser position adjustment knob (3) ND filter sliders

(for forward and backward (13) Connector for the
TR ET
LA EX SERS FN N
S 3B EN AM
GE ETZE
ION TIO TO NG
EN
AS WH E BE
LU
ÖF
OP
G SS
AH
– CL N TH
RS 3B CKUN AU
VO SE DE RAHL
UT DIA RE
OID LA
KLASNN ABM ST
CA R RAPOSU
HG fiber light
–
ICHT ,
adjustment)
WE HT DE
NIC
SE
AV
CA ER RAPOSU
LAS ID EX
AVO – LAS GE TZE
VO SSE EC AH
UTI DIA RE AHLUN

KLANN ABDM STR
WE HT DE
NIC
RS 3B KU L
ON TIO TO
ICHT , NG AU
– CLA N TH G
source adapter
SS WHEN E BE
3B OP AM
ER ÖFFNEN
STR
SSE
EN
T
(1) Optical fiber
CA
LAS UTION
AVO ER RAD – CLA
ID EXP IATI
ON SS
OSU WH 3B
VOR
SIC RE EN
TO OPE
WEN
NICH
HT
–
THE N
N
TABD LAS BEA
ECK ERS
DEM
M
UNG TRA
STR
HLU
AHL
GEÖ
FFN
NG
AUS
SET
ET
ZEN

centering screws
(7) Field diaphragm centering screws
open/close lever
(8) Field diaphragm open/close lever
Figure 1.4-23
(for forward and backward adjustment) (9) Aperture diaphragm centering screws
(3) ND filter sliders (10) Aperture diaphragm open/close lever
(For N-STORM, replace the ND16 by lambda
plate slider.) (11) ND filter sliders
(4) Focal point adjustment knob (12) Excitation filter slider

(5) Condenser lens locking screw (13) Connector for the HG fiber light source
adapter
(6) STORM slider
The TI-RCP remote control pad (or TI-ERGC ergo controller) allows users to change the illumination to
TIRF or episcopic as well as adjust the laser right or left (TIRF illumination angle adjustment).
User can perform the following for the TI-TIRF-E

The illumination is changed to TIRF (laser light)
or episcopic.
adjustment *
* The laser is adjusted right or left and the
TIRF Angle button TIRF / EPI button illumination angle of TIRF illumination (total
reflection illumination) is adjusted.
Figure 1.4-24
1-50
Laser safety cover
The cover prevents laser light from leaking. If the

laser safety cover is not attached, the motorized
shutters of the laser unit do not open.
CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
Laser safety cover Upper cover

DUC M
T
BEA
LAS TO
PRO
CLA ID EXP IATION
3B RE
ER
SS OSU
TURE
AVO ER RAD
E APERTED
OBJE T IS RE
CTIV EMIT
FROMR LIGH OSU
LAS
LASE EXP
ID
AVO
Body
Figure 1.4-26
CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
* If the safety interlock part is touched or gotten

VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM GEÖFFNET
STRAHL
AUSSETZEN
AVOID EXPOSURE
LASER LIGHT
APERTURE CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
wet, misoperation may occur.

SET
Z-RE
Coarse
Fine
ExFine LAY
DISP
S
NES ALL
GHT REC
BRI
ORY
Obj. US MEM
FOC PFS
EYE ON
ON/OFF
0
R10
6V30W
0
L10
12V100W
L80
MAX.
Figure 1.4-25
When using piezo-stages:
To use the piezo-stage together, the TI-TIRF-LSC Laser

safety cover/PZT is necessary. For how to attach the
TI-TIRF-LSC Laser safety cover/PZT, see “Setup
procedure and cautions” supplied with the TI-TIRF-LSC
Laser safety cover/PZT. Even when the TI-TIRF-LSC
Laser safety Laser safety cover/PZT is attached, the motorized
cover
shutters of the laser unit do not open unless the laser
safety cover is attached.

TI-S-ER Motorized
Stage with Encoders/ TI-TIRF-LSC Laser
TI-S-E Motorized Stage Safety Cover/PZT
Piezo Z stage
Figure 1.4-27
1-51
Laser safety kit
Filter slider cover

cover, protection plate, filter cube port cover
retraining plate, and safety labels.
Before using the product, check that the part
shown in the left figure is attached.
CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN

Section 1.3.2, “Ti-E Microscope Body.”
DUC M
T
BEA
LAS TO
PRO
CLA ID EXP IATION
3B RE
ER
SS OSU
TURE
AVO ER RAD
E APERTED
OBJE T IS RE
CTIV EMIT
FROMR LIGH OSU
LAS
LASE EXP
ID
AVO
CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
AVOID EXPOSURE
LASER LIGHT
APERTURE CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
SET
Z-RE
Coarse
Fine
ExFine LAY
DISP
S
NES ALL
GHT REC
BRI
ORY
Obj. US MEM
FOC PFS
EYE ON
ON/OFF
0
R10
6V30W
0
L10
12V100W
L80
MAX.

Figure 1.4-28
Filter cube port TI-FLC-E or The epi-fl filter turret is used to select an excitation
(and its cover) TI-FLC-E/HQ method by rotating the turret to change filter cubes
Front
Shutter lever
(O: open, C: close)
Figure 1.4-29

TI-LU4SU
Option switch unit.
LASER
EMISSION
POWER closed, and the lamp turns off.
Power lamp To unlock the safety interlock, solve what caused
the safety interlock being locked, then cancel the
Laser shutter
safety interlock from the software.
switch
Figure 1.4-30
1-52
The laser shutter does not open when the

nosepiece tube route of the optical path (“EYE”) is
Coarse
selected.
Fine
ExFine
BRIGHT
NESS
FOCUS tter
DISP
LAY Epi Shu
EYE Z-RESET
k
ON
FL Bloc
Ti-E
MEM
L100 ORY
PFS
s
R100 Refocu
L80
1.5X
1X
Escape

L100 Left port 100%
L80 Left port 80% and observation port 20%
R100 Right port 100%
Figure 1.4-31
Ti-E/B
L100 Left port 100%
B100 Bottom port 100%
N-STORM
The 3D-STORM port connecting the Ti-E

microscope and EM-CCD camera when performing
the N-STORM microscopy is equipped with the
Lambda plate
cylindrical lens that is placed in or out of the optical
slider imaging system to the camera by sliding the
handle. In normal microscopy and 2D-STORM
STORM slider
microscopy, remove the cylindrical lens out of the
optical path, and in capturing the 3D-STORM
image, insert it in the optical path.
Ti-E fixing
plate If the cylindrical lens is installed during normal
microscopy and 2D-STORM microscopy, images
Cylindrical lens are distorted. In 3D-STORM microscopy, the shape
DSC support column
OUT
IN/OUT handle of each bright spot changes to oval.
IN (When using this port together with the confocal
microscope A1, install the 3D-STORM port in the
3D-STORM port
right port. When using this port independently,
install it in the left port.)
3D-STORM port
Combination of A1 and 3D-STORM port
Figure 1.4-32
1-53
1.4.4 TI-PAU Photo Activation Illuminator Unit and Ti-U System
Specimen cover

Photo activation
illuminator unit
Interlock cable
TI-LUSU shutter
unit
Figure 1.4-33
Interlock cable
Specimen cover
Photo activation
illuminator unit
TI-LU4SU shutter
unit LU4
Figure 1.4-34
1-54
Photo Activation Illuminator Unit
Laser position adjustment knob HG fiber light source

(for forward and backward adjustment) adapter/lamphouse
Auxiliary filter slider mounting part for epi
Laser focus illumination
Laser focus adjustment
adjustment knob clamp screw
RS FF N
CA R RA POSU TR NET
LA GE ETZE
NG
S N AM
LU
G SS
EN
AS HE E BE
AH
ICHT , UN AU
3B OP
CL ON W TH
RS 3B CK HL
VO ASSE ABDESTRA
I TO
LA D EX SE
ION AT RE
KL N M
WEN T DE
UT DI
NICH
OI
SE
AV
CA R PO RSTR NE
LA D EX LASE
AV
UT RA SU
SE
OI
ION DIAT RE AHLU

VO ASSE ABDE STRA
Optical fiber
KL N M
WEN T DE
RS 3B CK HL
NICH
ICHT , UN AU
CL ON W TH
AS HE E
I TO
S N BE
3B OP AM
G SS
GE ETZE
EN
FILTER
FF N
NG
T
ND8
ND4
IN
IN
D
A. S. 8
ND
2
N
D
Laser position N N
N D 4
Excitation filter
D D
8 16
2
adjustment knob CA slider

(for right and left
UT
LAS ION
ER
AVO RAD CLA
ID EXP IATI SS
OSU ON WH 3B
VO RE EN
RSI
KLA TO OPE
WEN
CH
SSET THE N
NIC
N
3B,LAS
BEA
M
ND filter sliders
HT ABD
DEM
ERS
ECK
STR
UNG TRA
AHL
HLU
adjustment)
GE
AUS
NG
SET FFN
ET
ZEN
ND filter sliders Aperture diaphragm

Aperture diaphragm centering screws
Mirror switching lever open/close lever
• Push in: Mirror IN
(epi illumination)
• Pull out: Mirror OUT
(laser light)
Field diaphragm centering screws
(* with the total reflection mirror)
Field diaphragm open/close lever
Figure 1.4-35
Specimen cover
CAUTION
VORSICHT
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
The cover prevents illumination light from leaking.
Specimen cover
DUC M
T
BEA
LAS TO
PRO
CLA ID EXP IATION
3B RE
ER
SS OSU
TURE
AVO ER RAD
E APERTED
OBJE T IS RE
CTIV EMIT
FROMR LIGH OSU
LAS
LASE EXP
ID
AVO
CAUTION
CAUTION – CLASS
LASER – CLASS 3B
LASER RADIATION
AVOID 3B
RADIATIONWHEN
AVOID EXPOSURE
EXPOSURETO WHENOPEN
THE OPEN
VORSICHT TO THEBEAM
BEAM
KLASSE – LASERSTRAHLUN
VORSICHT
WENN 3B,
– LASERSTRAHLUNG
KLASSEABDECKUNG G
NICHT 3B,
WENN DEM STRAHL
ABDECKUNG
GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
AVOID EXPOSURE
LASER LIGHT
APERTURE CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
ON
OFF
6V30W
12V100W
MAX.
Figure 1.4-36
1-55
Laser safety kit

Filter slider cover
cover, protection plate for nosepiece, filter cube port
cover retaining plate, and safety labels, “(9) IEC
Filter cube port
aperture label 2” and “(7) IEC caution label – Class
cover retaining plate 3B areas”. Before using the microscope, CHECK that
each part of the laser safety kit is correctly attached.
CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
Safety label (7) (See the figure left.)
Protection plate (7) IEC caution label - Class 3B areas

(for nosepiece)
DUC M
T
BEA
LAS TO
PRO
CLA ID EXP IATION
3B RE
ER
SS OSU
TURE
AVO ER RAD
E APERTED
OBJE T IS RE
CTIV EMIT
FROMR LIGH OSU
LAS
LASE EXP
ID
AVO

CAUTION
CAUTION – CLASS
– CLASS 3B
KLASSE 3B,
LASER
LASER RADIATION
AVOID 3B
RADIATIONWHEN
AVOID EXPOSURE
EXPOSURETO WHENOPEN
THE OPEN
VORSICHT TO THEBEAM
BEAM
VORSICHT
WENN 3B,
– LASERSTRAHLUNG
KLASSEABDECKUNG G
NICHT 3B,
WENN DEM STRAHL
ABDECKUNG
GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
AVOID EXPOSURE
LASER LIGHT

APERTURE CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN

ON
OFF
6V30W
12V100W
MAX.
(9) IEC aperture label 2

Safety label (9)
(both sides)
Safety label (7) AVOID EXPOSURE
(both sides) FROM THIS APERTURE
Figure 1.4-37
Filter cube port TI-FLC epi-fl filter The epi-fl filter turret is used to select an excitation
(and its cover) turret method by rotating the turret to change filter cubes
Front
Filter cube address and Shutter lever

name on the optical path (O: open, C: close)
Filter cube rotation control
Figure 1.4-38
1-56
signal connector
AC adapter
12V close lamp
SAFETY
CLOSE
Eyepiece optical
BINO
CLOSE path closed lamp
POWER
Power switch
switch / indicator Power lamp

Figure 1.4-39

Option switch Indicator lamp laser unit.
TI-LU4SU
unit.
LASER
EMISSION
closed, and the lamp turns off.
POWER
To unlock the safety interlock, solve what caused
Power lamp the safety interlock being locked, then cancel the
safety interlock from the software.
Laser shutter
switch
Figure 1.4-40
Optical path selector knob (on the microscope body)
The laser shutter does not open when the binocular

PORT
Ti-U * Ti-U/B
EYE Visual observation 100% EYE Visual observation 100%
R Right port 100% R Right port 100%
AUX Auxiliary port B Bottom port 100%
PORT dial (Visual observation/left port L Left port 100%
= 20:80)
(optical path selector knob) (Visual observation/right port
= 20:80)
L Left port 100%
Figure 1.4-41

is 20 to 80.
follows:

R Right port 100%
L Left port 100%
1-57
1.4.5 Laser Unit
Two-laser Unit (C-LU2)

(2)
(3) Shutter unit connector
(1) (4) ND filter slider
(5) Single-mode fiber
(3)
(4) (5)
Figure 1.4-42
* For details of available lasers for each position of laser units, see Section 8.1.4, “Mountable Lasers” in
Chapter 8, “Specifications and Performance.”
Three-laser unit (C-LU3)

(3) (1) (3) Laser mounting position L3
(4) Shutter unit connector
(2) (5) ND filter slider
(4)
(5)
(6)
Figure 1.4-43
1-58
Three-laser unit EX (C-LU3EX)

(2) (4) Shutter unit connector
(3) (1)
(6) Brightness control knob
(7) Ar wavelength selector (optional)
(5)
(8) (8) AOM connector (optional)
(4)
(6) (6)
(7) (6)
Figure 1.4-44
1-59
Four-laser module A (LU4A)

(3) (3) Laser mounting position L3
transportation.
four blocks during

(4) (1) (5) Single-mode fiber
(2) *1
*1 (7) Power switch
(6)
(5) (8) AC inlet
(9) Remote switch
(10) CONTROLLER connector
(Do not use in this system.)
(11) AOTF/PC connector
(12) Interlock cable connectors
Figure 1.4-45
(13) LUSU connector
(14) USB connector
(15) LD connector
(13)
*1: Installed only when the N-STORM kit is
(7) (15) mounted
(8) (12)
Precautions when handling the laser unit

(9) (11) (10) (14) • The laser head and the optical fiber are
Figure 1.4-46 precisely aligned in these units.
Avoid subjecting the laser head or optical
fiber to vibration or shock. Contact the
distributor if you need to remove the laser
head from the unit due to laser malfunction
or other reasons.
L4 L3 L2 L1 POWER
Indicating shutter conditions

Figure 1.4-47
1-60
Four-laser PS rack (LU-LR)
(1) EMISSION laser indicator

(2) POWER laser indicator
(1) (2)
(3) EMISSION key switch
(3) (4) Power switch
(5) INTERLOCK connector
(6) Cooling fan
(7) Power breaker for 15 A line
(9) Caution label
(Front view)
(10) Name plate for 15 A line ratings
(5)
(12) AC inlet for 15 A line
(4) (6) (13) AC inlet for 5 A line
(7) (8)
(9)
(10)
(12)
(13) (11)
(Rear view)
Figure 1.4-48
1-61
1.4.6 Laser Safety Kit
The laser safety kit is supplied with all laser products mounted onto a Ti microscope.
Labels affixed to each laser product include a name label and other types of necessary labels, both of which
are not shown here.
The laser safety kit is composed of the filter slider cover, protection plate for nosepiece, filter cube port cover
retaining plate, and safety labels, “(7) IEC caution label – Class 3B areas” and “(9) IEC aperture label”.
Before using the microscope, CHECK that each part of the laser safety kit is correctly attached. (See the
figure below.)
Filter slider cover

Dia pillar illuminator (7) IEC caution label -Class 3B areas
Filter cube port
CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT

3B, G
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
Safety label (7) cover retaining plate

KLASSE 3B,
Protection plate
(for nosepiece)
DUC M
T
BEA
LAS TO
PRO
SS OSU N
3B RE
CLA ID EXP IATIO
ER
E
AVO ER RAD
TUR
E APERTED
I RE
CTIVS EMIT
FRO R LIGH OSU
LAS
LASE EXP
M OBJE T
ID
AVO
(9) IEC aperture label 2
AVOID EXPOSURE
FROM THIS APERTURE
CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG G
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
AVOID EXPOSUR
Figure 1.4-50
LASER LIGHT E
APERTURE CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B, G
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
Analyzer port ON
OFF
6V30W
12V100W
MAX.
Safety label (9) Safety label (7)

(Both sides) (Both sides)
Figure 1.4-49
Filter slider cover
The filter slider cover is a component designed for preventing unintended exposure of eyes or skin at the
slider port to laser light emitted to the dia-pillar illuminator. To attach it to the Ti microscope, lay it over the
dia-pillar illuminator and secure it with the screws and nuts provided with the kit.
Filter cube port cover retaining plate
The filter cube port cover retaining plate is a component designed for preventing accidental leakage of laser
light upon occurrence of unintended opening of the filter cube port cover.
Attach it to the side of the epi-fl filter turret’s lower plate using the screws provided with the kit.
Safety labels
The label (7) affixed to the upper left side (when viewed from the Binocular eyepiece tube) of the dia pillar
indicates that the laser light may come out from the aperture when the lamphouse is removed for
replacement of the lamp inside.
Another labels (7) on both sides of the microscope base indicates that the laser light may come out from the
aperture while attaching the epi-fl filter turret or the nosepiece to the microscope.
The labels (9) on both sides of the microscope base indicates that the laser light may come out of the
analyzer port.
1-62
Protection plate (for nosepiece)
The protection plate (for nosepiece) is a component designed for shielding the gap between the nosepiece
and the epi-fl filter turret to avoid accidental jamming of fingers inserted into the gap or the laser radiation
from the gap.
Two types of protection plate are prepared for the nosepiece being used. One for the TI-N6, TI-ND6 and
TI-ND6-E nosepieces is supplied with Ti-E and Ti-E/B, and the other for the TI-ND6-PFS nosepiece is
supplied with the nosepiece. Follow the procedure described in “4.2.3 Attaching the Laser Safety Kit” to
attach the protection plate in place.
1-63
1.4.7 Related Product
TI-BPU back port unit
Adding a camera port by attaching the TI-BPU back port unit to the microscope base allows for a concurrent
image capture with two cameras.
Attach a C mount camera via a separate C mount adapter to the back port unit and perform focus adjustment
and centering.
Important
The dichroic mirror inside the filter cube is used to split the optical path, therefore, the dichroic mirror with
a poor flatness may cause lens effect due to a curved surface reflection, resulting in poor image
formation.
Use a dichroic mirror with higher flatness to be used for optical path split.
C mount adapter
clamp screws (two) Focus knob
(separately available)
C mount adapter Clamp screw
To eyepiece
Centering screws (two)
Portion to be inserted into
the microscope
Figure 1.4-51
1-64
TI-BSUK70 70 mm stage up kit
By attaching the TI-BSUK70 70 mm stage up kit and doubly mounting the epi-fl filter turrets, you can attach
any of the TIRF illuminator unit/motorized TIRF illuminator unit/photo activation illuminator unit and TI-BPU
back port unit simultaneously.
The unit that can be attached to the upper or lower tier is selectable in accordance with the intended use.
Important
The condensing position will be misaligned when the TIRF illuminator unit/motorized TIRF illuminator
unit/photo activation illuminator unit is attached to the lower tier.
When attaching to the lower tier, embed the TI-TIRF stage up lens into the TIRF illuminator unit/motorized
TIRF illuminator unit/photo activation illuminator unit to correct the condensing position and provide the
optimum illumination performance.
Contact your own Nikon representative for details on the stage up lens.
The following figure shows the Ti-U with the stage up kit mounted, along with the TIRF illuminator unit on the
upper tier and the back port unit on the lower tier.
Epi-fl filter turret (upper tier)
Epi-fl filter turret (lower tier)

Back port unit
Figure 1.4-52
1-65
Positioning pin
Stage support block Nosepiece support block
Epi-fl filter turret Shielding plate Epi-fl filter turret

support block (left) support block (right)
Positioning pin
Dia-illuminator pillar support block Support pillar extension
Figure 1.4-53
1-66
2 Preparations
2.1 Check Items and Tools
2.1.1 Required Items
Make sure you have all of the following items before starting.
• PC (complete set)
• PC-related devices
• Operating system
• Laser: Recommended laser (see Chapter 1, “System Configuration and Part Names”)
• Camera system (for TIRF and PAU image observation)
• Dichroic mirror (when the photo activation illuminator unit is used only.)
• One power cable
one cable for the four-laser module: 100 VAC area: 125 VAC 7 A or higher;
200 VAC area: 250 VAC 6 A or higher
one cable for the AOM controller: 100 VAC area: 125 VAC 7 A or higher;
two cables for the laser PS rack: 100 VAC area: 125 VAC 7 A or higher;
200 VAC area: 250 VAC 6 A or higher, and
100 VAC area: 125 VAC 15 A or higher;
CAUTION
Be sure to prepare power cables satisfying the ratings as specified above and complying with
the local safety standards. Extra care must be taken for the laser PS rack in particular, which
has a great current capacity.
1-67
Chapter 2 Preparations
2.1.2 Tools
The following are the tools required in the setup procedure. Before starting, make sure you have the
following tools required to set up the system.
General tools
• Allen wrench (mm, inch)

• Phillips screwdriver
• Fluorescent slide specimen (you can also use an HE-stained specimen)
Special tools
• Laser-protection goggles • Calibrated power meter
Figure 2.1-1 Figure 2.1-2
• Power measurement attachment • Dichroic mirror centering tool
• Coupler-centering tool • Centering tool for visual observations and mirror for
observing centering tool
• Nikon 2-piece M4 screwdriver set • Polarization orientation adjustment tool and

(with red handles) polarizer-equipped tool
• AOTF driver remote controller (for maintenance) • Centering tool (left: for LU4A)
* Two pieces of a type are required.
1-68
2.2 Overview of Setup Procedure
Setting Up the PC and

1 Operation Software
(Chapter 3)
• Attaching the light source (TI-TIRF, TI-TIRF-E, or TI-PAU)

2 Setting Up the Microscope
(Chapter 4)
• Attaching the dichroic mirror (TI-PAU only)
• Attaching the epi-fl filter turret (TI-FLC, TI-FLC-E, or
TI-FLC-E/HQ)
• Assembling the microscope
• Attaching the field diaphragm unit
• Attaching the laser safety cover (TI-TIRF or TI-TIRF-E)
• Mounting the filter cubes
• Attaching the camera
• For two-laser unit and three-laser unit

3 Laser Unit (Chapter 5) •
•
For three-laser unit EX
For the four-laser module A
• For the four-laser PS rack
Connection between the Laser • Connection to the Shutter Unit

4 Unit and the Microscope
(Chapter 6)
• Connection to the fiber light source (TI-TIRF, TI-TIRF-E, or
TI-PAU)
• Replacing the optical path switch mirror (if necessary)
Confirmation and • Laser safety check

5 Check Sheet
(Chapter 7)
• Check sheet entry
1-69
3 Setting Up the PC and Operation Software
Using TIRF and PAU microscopy, images are observed on a monitor, via a camera attached to the
microscope camera port. TIRF images and laser port images from PAU microscopy cannot be observed
through the eyepieces. Make sure to set up the PC and operation software for the camera to be used.
1-70
4.1 List of Parts

The parts below have been added to the basic set of the Ti-E, Ti-E/B, Ti-U, and Ti-U/B.
The procedures for attaching sub-units and parts required for installing the TIRF-PAU illuminator are
described later in this section.
TIRF illuminator unit or motorized TIRF illuminator unit
Table 4.1-1
Unit Name of equipment Model Remarks
Ti-E
Ti-E/B Use with the TI-DH dia-illuminator
Ti
Ti-U 100W.
Ti-U/B
Apo TIRF 60xH/1.49
Apo TIRF 100xH/1.49
Plan Apo TIRF 60xH/1.45 Select the appropriate objective
Objectives for TIRF
Plan Apo TIRF 100xH/1.45 for observation.
Plan Apo VC 60xH/1.4
Plan Apo VC 100xH/1.4
TI-LUSU
Shutter Unit PC compatible
Microscope and TI-LU4SU
accessories AD-1260B
AC adapter For TI-LUSU shutter unit
EA1050E-120
TI-FLC Three exclusive high-precision
Epi-fl filter turret for
TI-FLC-E filter cubes are supplied with the
epi-fl illumination
TI-FLC-E/HQ TI-FLC-E/HQ as accessories.
Fiber optic light source Make sure to read the instruction

Episcopic light source
Lamphouse + power supply manuals for the product.
26
Stage ring 32 is made of glass.
32
Stage up kit TI-BSUK70
TI-BSUK70 70 mm stage up kit is
Back port unit TI-BPU
required.
TI-TIRF TIRF100 and TIRF60 - EPI40 are
TI-TIRF-E interchangeable.
Straight fiber can be used
Fiber C1 single mode fiber combined with the straight fiber
adapter.
When connecting an optical fiber
TIRF/ that has a straight tip, install a
Straight fiber adapter TIRF2 S
motorized TIRF straight fiber adapter to the
illuminator unit attachment.
When using the TIRF/motorized
TIRF illuminator unit on the lowest
step during stageup, install the
TI-TIRF
Stage up lens stage up lens to the
Stage up lens
TIRF/motorized TIRF illuminator
unit. The TI-BSUK70 70 mm stage
up kit is required to stageup.
1-71
Chapter 4 Setting Up the Microscope
4.1 List of Parts

Commercially-
PC
available PC
TIRF image Commercially-
Monitor
observation available monitor
Commercially- An adapter is required for
TV camera
available TV camera connection to the microscope port.
Two-laser unit C-LU2
Three-laser unit C-LU3 See “Chapter 5 Laser Unit” for
Laser Unit details on which lasers can be
Three-laser unit EX C-LU3EX mounted.
Four-laser module A LU4A
Filter slider cover
Filter cube port cover

Ti laser safety kit retaining plate
Safety label
Protection plate
1-72
4.1 List of Parts
Photo activation illuminator unit

Table 4.1-2
Ti-E
Ti-E/B Use with the TI-DH dia-illuminator
Ti
Ti-U 100W.
Ti-U/B
TI-LUSU
Shutter Unit PC compatible
TI-LU4SU
AD-1260B
EA1050E-120
TI-FLC
Microscope and
Epi-fl filter turret for
accessories TI-FLC-E
epi-fl illumination
TI-FLC-E/HQ
Fiber optic light source
Make sure to read the instruction
Episcopic light source Lamphouse + power manuals for the product.
supply
26
Stage ring 32 is made of glass.
32
required.
Photo activation Switches PA-GFP/EPI. Requires an
Photo activation TI-PAU
illuminator unit optical path switch mirror.
illuminator unit
Fiber C1 single mode fiber
PC Commercially-available PC
Commercially-
PA-GFP image Monitor
available monitor
observation
Commercially- An adapter is required for connection
TV camera
available TV camera to the microscope port.
Three-laser unit C-LU3 See “Chapter 5 Laser Unit” for details
Laser Unit
Three-laser unit EX C-LU3EX on which lasers can be mounted.

Filter slider cover

Ti laser safety kit retaining plate
Safety label
Protection plate
1-73
4.2 Setup Procedure
4.2 Setup Procedure
4.2.1 Assembling Each Part and Attaching Them to the Microscope
Perform the steps below to assemble each part and attach them to the microscope.
Attach the light source (TIRF illuminator unit, motorized TIRF illuminator unit, or photo
1 activation illuminator unit).
⇒ Page 1-75
2 Attach the dichroic mirrors (photo activation illuminator unit only). ⇒ Page 1-77
3 Attach the field diaphragm unit. ⇒ Page 1-78
4 Attach the epi-fl filter turret. ⇒ Page 1-79
5 Assemble the remaining microscope parts. ⇒ Page 1-79
Attach the laser safety cover (TIRF illuminator unit or motorized TIRF illuminator unit
6 only).
⇒ Page 1-80
7 Attach the light shielding plate. ⇒ Page 1-80
8 Attach the filter cubes. ⇒ Page 1-81
9 Attach the camera. ⇒ Page 1-81
10 Affix the labels. ⇒ Page 1-82
1-74
4.2 Setup Procedure
1 Attach the light source (TIRF illuminator unit, motorized TIRF illuminator unit, or photo
activation illuminator unit).
1. Remove the black cover on the center of the

microscope base.
(1) Using an Allen wrench, remove the two
screws securing the black cover.
(2) Remove the black cover.
Remove the black cover

Figure 4.2-1
2. Attach the light source (TIRF illuminator unit,

Insert the light source
motorized TIRF illuminator unit, or photo
activation illuminator unit) to the microscope main
body.
(1) Insert the light source into the guide on the
back of the microscope main body.
Four clamp screws (2) Secure the light source by tightening the 4
clamp screws using the Allen wrench.
Figure 4.2-2
3. Attach the support pillar to the light source.

(1) Use an Allen wrench to loosen the clamp
screw securing the support pillar so that the
sliding part at the end slides freely.
(2) Screw the support pillar into the mounting
hole on the bottom of the light source to
attach it.
(3) Adjust the length of the support pillar so that
Support pillar its tip touches the installation surface, and
Figure 4.2-3
then tighten the clamp screw with the Allen
wrench to secure it.
1-75
4.2 Setup Procedure
Mercury episcopic light source adapter 4. Connect the mercury episcopic light source
adapter (or mercury lamphouse) to the episcopic
light-source port (bayonet ring)
Connect the episcopic light source on the side
where you attached the support pillar in step 3.
For details about attaching the light source, see
the instructions of your mercury lamp power
supply or super-high pressure mercury lamp
power supply.
Figure 4.2-4
Clamping hardware 5. Attach the clamping hardware to the episcopic

light-source port.
Secure the clamping hardware by tightening the
two clamp screws using the Allen wrench.
The clamping hardware is provided to prevent the
PA-GFP irradiation attachment from being
removed by mistake. Be sure to attach the screw
for laser safety.
Figure 4.2-5
Laser position 6. Remove the anchor on the laser side.

adjustment knob The laser position adjusting mechanism comes
equipped with an anchor for transportation. Be
sure to remove the anchor before turning the
laser position adjustment knobs.
Attempting to turn either of the knobs without
first removing the anchor may cause the
Laser position mechanism to malfunction.
adjustment knob
(1) For TI-PAU:
Anchoring bolt
The two laser position adjustment knobs are
Laser connection port (TI-PAU)
loosened before transportation. Turn both
Laser position knobs gently clockwise until you feel
adjustment knob resistance, and then remove the anchoring
Anchoring ring
bolt.
(2) For TI-TIRF/TI-TIRF-E
Two clamping
screws The two laser position adjustment knobs are
loosened before transportation. Tighten both
Laser position knobs by turning them gently clockwise until
adjustment knob you feel resistance. Then, extract the two
Laser connection port (TI-TIRF)
locking screws and remove the brass
anchor ring.
Figure 4.2-6
1-76
4.2 Setup Procedure
Anchoring bolt 7. Remove the anchoring bolt from the optical path
switching module.
The optical path switching module comes
equipped with an anchor for transportation. Be
sure to remove the anchor before use.
1. Unscrew the anchoring bolt from the top of
the optical path switching module.
2. To plug the hole where the anchoring bolt
was, screw in the button bolt provided.
Figure 4.2-7
2 Attach the dichroic mirrors (photo activation illuminator unit only).
It is necessary to attach a dichroic mirror (optical path switch mirror), which switches between laser light and
episcopic illumination, inside the photo activation illuminator unit. Since the attachment does not ship with a
mirror attached, you must attach one following the procedure below.
You can also change the light intensity ratio of laser light and episcopic illumination by switching the dichroic
mirror and operating the optical path switch lever.
Ordinarily, you should attach a total reflection mirror. When using a total reflection mirror, operating the
optical path switch switches between 100% laser light and 100% episcopic illumination.
WARNING
To prevent hazardous laser emission from the mirror replacement opening, turn off the laser
power before replacing mirrors.
Cap 1. Remove the retaining screw for the cap of the

mirror replacement opening using the Allen
wrench, and then remove the cap by turning it
counterclockwise.
Figure 4.2-8
1-77
4.2 Setup Procedure
Holder plate locking screws 2. Remove the mirror unit from inside the
illuminator, and insert the dichroic mirror.
(1) When removing the mirror unit, pull out the
mirror switch lever, and then pull out the
mirror unit while holding the tab of the mirror
unit (magnetic lock).
Holder plate
(2) Remove the two holder plate locking
screws. Next, remove the holder plate and
flat spring to attach the mirror.
Flat spring • Mirror size: 36 x 25.7 x 1
Mirror 3. Attach the mirror unit in its original position, and

(Place the then close the cap of the mirror replacement
reflection
surface
opening.
downward.) (1) There is a positioning hole on the mirror
unit. Securely attach the mirror unit to the
illuminator to fit the pin on the main body.
Mirror unit (2) Screw the cap of the mirror replacement
opening until it is closed.
Figure 4.2-9
(3) Tighten the optical path switching module
screw using the Allen wrench, and secure
the cover.
3 Attach the field diaphragm unit.
Locking screw 1. Remove the rubber cap on the left side of the
microscope.
2. Insert the field diaphragm unit.
3. Tighten the locking screw using an Allen wrench,
and secure the field diaphragm unit.
CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B, HLUNG
WENN ABDECKUN
NICHT DEM G
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
Field diaphragm unit
Figure 4.2-10
1-78
4.2 Setup Procedure
4 Attach the epi-fl filter turret.
Attach the epi-fl filter turret to the microscope main body.

Insert the epi-fl filter turret along the attachment groove from the right side of the microscope and
secure with screws on the left and right. (Use an Allen wrench. Note that the screws should be
tightened after the filter cube port cover is removed.)
Insert from right
Filter cube port (and its cover)
Front side
Figure 4.2-11
When using the epi-fl filter turret in combination with the Ti-E or Ti-E/B, the protection plate (for
nosepiece) must be installed between the epi-fl filter turret and the nosepiece.
* For installation procedure, see Section 4.2.3, “Attaching the Laser Safety Kit.”
5 Assemble the remaining microscope parts.
Refer to the instruction manual included with the microscope main body before assembling the
remaining microscope parts.
1-79
4.2 Setup Procedure
6 Attach the laser safety cover (TIRF illuminator unit or motorized TIRF illuminator unit only).
If you are using the TIRF illuminator unit or the

motorized TIRF illuminator unit, the motorized shutter
will not open unless the laser safety cover is attached
CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
on the stage. Make sure it is attached in the prescribed
position.
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
Laser safety cover

1. Place the laser safety cover body on the stage,
and secure it by tightening the 4 screws with the
Allen wrench.
PRO M
T
ER BEA
DUC
LAS TO
CLA ID EXP IATION
3B RE
SS OSU
TURE
AVO ER RAD
APERTED
OBJE IS RE
CTIVE EMIT
FROMR LIGHT OSU
LAS
LASE EXP
ID
AVO
2. Connect the laser safety cover’s cable to the

safety-cover connector of the TI-LUSU shutter
CAUTION
VORSICHT
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
unit.
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
3. Attach the cover on top of the body.

AVOID EXPOSURE
LASER LIGHT
APERTURE CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
The interlock will close the motorized shutter of

ON
OFF
6V30W
12V100W
MAX.
the laser unit if the cover is removed during use.

* In the case of the photo activation illuminator unit,
Upper cover you must attach a specimen cover on the stage
when using episcopic illumination or laser light.
* Touching the interlocking part or getting it wet could
cause it to malfunction.
Safety interlock (both sides) Body
Figure 4.2-12
7 Attach the light shielding plate.
Light shielding plate

Using an Allen wrench, screw the light shielding plate
onto the eyepiece tube.
Figure 4.2-13
1-80
4.2 Setup Procedure
8 Attach the filter cubes.
You can attach up to six filter cubes in the epi-fl filter turret.
Indication of address 1. Remove the filter cube port cover, check the turret
on the optical path address, and insert the filter cubes along the guide
(position for ID sticker) groove.
2. Rotate the filter cube rotation control to display the
same address and affix an ID sticker that matches
the filter cube type.
Affix or (a blank sticker that can be written
on freely) on spaces in which no filter cube is
inserted.
AVOID EXPO
LASER LIGHT SURE
FROM THIS IS EMITT
APERTURE ED CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIAT 3B
AVOID EXPOS ION WHEN OPEN
URE TO THE
BEAM
VORSICHT
KLASSE – LASERSTRAHLU
3B, NG
WENN ABDECK
UNG
3. Re-attach the filter cube port cover.

NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
Excitation method
changeover ring Note: Excitation and barrier filters can be removed
from the filter cube and replaced with other
Address marking filters. (The filters are screwed into the filter
Filter cube cube.)
4. Attach the filter cube port cover retaining plate.
Important
• Three exclusive high-precision filter cubes are
Excitation filter supplied with the TI-FLC-E/HQ motorized epi-fl
filter turret as accessories. These filter cubes
Set the filter cube with its excitation filter
facing outside. (Do not set it in opposite way.) are adjusted to the address of the epi-fl filter
turret. Make sure to attach the exclusive
Figure 4.2-14 high-precision filter cubes by matching the
inscribed addresses.
retaining plate • If you use an excitation filter attached to the
excitation filter slider, attach the filter cube to
the excitation filter.
Fixing screw
Figure 4.2-15
9 Attach the camera.
Attach the camera to the camera port.
1-81
4.2 Setup Procedure
10 Affix the labels.

After confirming the safety of the laser (p.1-228 to 1-230), affix the specified warning labels to the
locations shown below.
Left side of microscope main unit

Affix “(7) IEC caution label - Class 3B area” on the left side of the microscope main unit, under the field
diaphragm.
Both sides of microscope main body

Affix “(7) IEC caution label - Class 3B area” and “(9) IEC aperture label 2” above the right and left ports
of the microscope main unit.
On 100W dia pillar illuminator

Affix “(7) IEC caution label - Class 3B area” on the dia pillar illuminator 100W.
CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
(7)
OD AM
T
UC
R PR BE
LASE RE TO
S 3B POSU N
CLAS EX DIATIO
RE
RTU
E APETED
AVOIDR RA
JEC IS EMRE
TIV IT
LASE
M OB HT SU
FRO ER LIG PO
LASOID EX
AV
CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B, HLUNG
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
AVOID EXPOS
LASER LIGHT URE
APERTUR CAUTION
– CLASS
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
(7)
ON
OFF
6V30W
12V100W
MAX.

Figure 4.2-16
1-82
4.2 Setup Procedure
On the laser safety cover (TIRF illuminator unit or motorized TIRF illuminator unit)
Make sure that the following three warning labels at the rear left, when viewed from the Binocular
eyepiece tube: “(1) IEC warning label - laser hazard symbol”, “(2) IEC explanatory label - Class 3B
laser product”, and “(8) IEC aperture label 1” is affixed.
(2) (1)
Laser
LASER RADIATION
safety cover
(8)
AVOID EXPOSURE
Stage top surface
Figure 4.2-17
Top surface of stage (photo activation illuminator unit)

(2) (1)
About 5 mm About 5 mm
Stage top surface
About 5 mm
LASER RADIATION
About 5 mm
AVOID EXPOSURE
(8)
Figure 4.2-18
1-83
4.2 Setup Procedure
Laser unit
Remove the laser safety label if it is attached to the laser unit.
Remove the laser

safety labels.
About 12 mm
About 20 mm
About 12 mm
About 30 mm
Figure 4.2-19
1-84
4.2 Setup Procedure
4.2.2 Attaching the N-STORM Kit
Install the following parts to the microscope to perform N-STORM microscopy.
Ti-E fixing plates

Attach plates to fix the microscope to the anti-vibration table.
Detach the front and rear rubber feet at the

bottom of the microscope and secure the fixing
plates (front and rear).
Install the microscope to the anti-vibration table
according to the inch holes or centimeter holes.
(Rear) (Front)
Ti-E fixing plates
Figure 4.2-20
3D-STORM port
Attach an optical system for N-STORM to the microscope.
Detach the plastic cover on the side port of the
microscope and install the 3D-STORM port.
When using the port independently, install it in
the left side port. When using the port together
with the confocal microscope A1, install it in the
right side port.
Note: The 3D-STORM port cannot be installed
in the bottom port or the back port.
Cylindrical lens
OUT IN/OUT handle
IN
3D-STORM port
3D-STORM port
Combination of A1 and 3D-STORM port
Figure 4.2-21
1-85
4.2 Setup Procedure
DSC support columns (2 pieces)

Attach supports to fix the camera to the anti-vibration table.
Screw the supports in the screw holes in the camera
(Andor iXon) body.
Secure the camera to the side 3D-STORM port of the
microscope and set the magnet base to ON.
DSC support columns
Figure 4.2-22
STORM slider
Insert the dedicated optical system into the TIRF optical system to perform N-STORM microscopy.
Detach the cover at the upper part of the laser
OUT introduction section in the motorized TIRF illuminator
unit.
IN
STORM slider You can see a slot to insert the STORM slider. Insert
the slider into the slot.
Then attach the cover to prevent the slider from
coming off.
Insert this slider during N-STORM microscopy, but
slide it out of the optical path in other cases.
Figure 4.2-23
Lambda plate slider

Insert an optical device for polarization adjustment to perform N-STORM microscopy.
Remove the stopper screw and detach the ND16 of
the motorized TIRF illuminator unit.
Lambda
plate slider Insert the lambda plate slider into the same position.
Install the stopper screw.
Insert this slider during N-STORM microscopy, but
slide it out of the optical path in other cases.
Figure 4.2-24
1-86
4.2 Setup Procedure
4.2.3 Attaching the Laser Safety Kit
Refer to the instruction manual included with the microscope main body before attaching the laser safety kit.
1. Attach the filter slider cover to the dia pillar

Filter slider cover
illuminator 100W.
Dia pillar Put the filter slider cover from above the dia
illuminator
pillar illuminator 100W and secure it using the
Screws and nuts screws and nuts provided with the laser safety
(both side) kit.
Figure 4.2-25
2. Attach the protection plate for nosepiece

between the epi-fl filter turret and the nosepiece.
Notes on attaching the nosepiece --- When the epi-fl filter turret is used
The protection plate for nosepiece is a component designed for shielding the gap between
the nosepiece and the epi-fl filter turret to avoid accidental jamming of fingers inserted into
the gap or the laser radiation from the gap.
Two types of protection plate are prepared for the nosepiece being used. One for the TI-N6,
TI-ND6 and TI-ND6-E nosepieces is supplied with Ti-E and Ti-E/B, and the other for the
TI-ND6-PFS nosepiece is supplied with the nosepiece. Follow the procedure below to attach
each protection plate.
If the Perfect Focus System is not used

1) Remove the two M3 hexagon socket head
M5 Hexagon TI-N6 (6 nosepiece), bolts secured on top of the epi-fl filter turret
socket head TI-ND6 (DIC 6 nosepiece), or
bolts (x 2) TI-ND6-E (motorized DIC 6 nosepiece)
(TI-FLC, TI-FLC-E, or TI-FLC-E/HQ), using
the 2-mm hexagonal screwdriver appended
M3 Hexagon Protection plate to the Ti-E and Ti-E/B.
socket head (for nosepiece)
bolts (x 2)
2) Attach the protection plate (for nosepiece)
appended to the Ti-E or Ti-E/B to the top
portion of the epi-fl filter turret and secure
the plate using the two M3 hexagon socket
head bolts removed in step 1).
3) Attach the nosepiece (TI-N6, TI-ND6, or
TI-ND6-E) to the Ti-E or Ti-E/B and secure
G
N
AM
ET
N
AVOID EXPOS
it using the 4-mm hexagonal screwdriver
appended to the Ti-E and Ti-E/B.
LASER LIGHT URE
APERTUR CAUTION
– CLASS
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
Figure 4.2-26
1-87
4.2 Setup Procedure
If the Perfect Focus System is used

1) Remove the four M3 hexagon socket head
M5 Hexagon TI-ND6-PFS bolts secured on top of the epi-fl filter turret
socket head (motorized PFS
bolts (x 2) 6 nosepiece)
Cable port to the Ti-E and Ti-E/B.
M3 Hexagon Protection plate 2) Attach the protection plate (for PFS6
socket head (for PFS6 nosepiece) nosepiece) appended to the PFS6
bolts (x 4)
nosepiece to the top portion of the epi-fl
filter turret and secure the plate using the
four M3 hexagon socket head bolts
removed in step 1).
3) With the cable of the PFS6 nosepiece
being routed through the cable port of the
M
protection plate to the Ti-E or Ti-E/B, attach
the PFS6 nosepiece to the Ti-E or Ti-E/B
T
AVOID EXPOS
LASER LIGHT URE
APERTUR CAUTION
– CLASS
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
and secure it using the 4-mm hexagonal

3B,
WENN AB
Figure 4.2-27 screwdriver appended to the Ti-E and

Ti-E/B.

Filter cube port 3-1. After attaching the filter cube, re-attach the
cover retaining filter cube port cover. (For how to attach
plate the filter cube, see the instruction manual
included with the microscope main body.)
3-2. Attach the filter cube port cover retaining
plate to the side surface of the epi-fl filter
turret’s lower plate using the screws
Fixing screw
provided with the laser safety kit.
Figure 4.2-28
1-88
4.2 Setup Procedure
4.2.4 Attaching the Stage Up Kit
any of the TIRF illuminator unit/ motorized TIRF illuminator unit/photo activation illuminator unit and TI-BPU
back port unit simultaneously.
Attach the stage up kit immediately after attaching the eyepiece base unit and the epi-fl filter turret on the
lower tier.
1. Attach the stage support block to eyepiece base unit.

The installation surface of eyepiece base unit has one positioning pin. Align it with the bottom surface of
the stage support block, and use the 4-mm hexagonal screwdriver supplied with the microscope to
secure it by tightening two hexagon socket head bolts.
2. Attach the epi-fl filter turret support block (right/left) respectively to the right/left side of the base plate of
the epi-fl filter turret attached on the lower tier.
Use the 2.5-mm hexagonal wrench supplied with the epi-fl filter turret to secure them by tightening two
hexagon socket head bolts respectively.
3. Attach a shielding plate on the top of the epi-fl filter turret support blocks.
Use the 2-mm hexagonal screwdriver supplied with the microscope to secure it by tightening four
hexagon socket head button bolts.
4. Attach the nosepiece support block on the installation surface of the nosepiece on the microscope.
Use the 4-mm hexagonal screwdriver supplied with the microscope to secure it by tightening two
hexagon socket head bolts.
5. Attach the dia-illuminator pillar support block on the installation surface of the dia-illuminator pillar on
the microscope.
The installation surface of the dia-illuminator pillar on the microscope has two positioning pins. Align
them with the positioning holes on the bottom surface of the dia-illuminator pillar support block, and use
the 4-mm hexagonal screwdriver supplied with the microscope to secure it by tightening four hexagon
socket head bolts.
6. The support pillar extension supplied with the stage up kit is used to extend the support pillar supplied
with the illuminator unit when the TIRF illuminator unit/motorized TIRF illuminator unit/photo activation
illuminator unit is attached on the upper tier. Attach the support pillar extension between the support
pillar and the bottom of the epi-fl illuminator unit of the TIRF illuminator unit/motorized TIRF illuminator
unit/photo activation illuminator unit.
1-89
4.2 Setup Procedure
Hexagon socket head bolt Hexagon socket head bolt

(M5, two) (M5, four)
Shielding plate
Hexagon socket head bolt
(M5, two)
Stage support block

Dia-illuminator pillar support
Hexagon socket head button bolt block
(M3, four)
Epi-fl filter turret support block

(left)
Nosepiece support block
(M3, two)

(right)

(M3, two)
Figure 4.2-29
1-90
4.2 Setup Procedure
Attaching the support pillar extension
To attach the TIRF illuminator unit/motorized TIRF illuminator unit/photo activation illuminator unit to the
upper tier, attach the support pillar extension supplied with the stage up kit to the support pillar supplied with
the illuminator unit.
Support pillar extension

(supplied with the stage up kit)
Support pillar
(supplied with the illuminator unit)
Figure 4.2-30
1-91
4.2 Setup Procedure
4.2.5 Attaching the Back Port Unit
Insert the back port unit into the guide on the rear of the microscope body and use the hexagonal
screwdriver (4-mm) to secure it from behind by tightening screws.
• The following figure shows the back port unit being attached to the lower tier:
• To attach the unit to the upper tier, attach a unit to be attached to the lower tier first and then attach the
one to the upper tier.
• You must have installed the HUB controller when you use a HUB controller.
• Attach the camera at the end.
Insert the back port unit body
Figure 4.2-31
1-92
5 Laser Unit
WARNING
• The unit must be set up as instructed by the local LSO (Laser Safety Officer).
• This laser unit uses Class 3B lasers. Accidental exposure of eyes or skin to laser light may result in
injury or other problems. Do not turn on the lasers until they are installed in the laser unit
• Confirm that there is no one in the area before turning on the lasers.
• Always wear laser-protection goggles while lasers are turned on.
• Do not place tools or optical components such as mirrors in the light path while lasers are turned on.
• Use the lowest output power rating during setup. For Ar lasers, use standby mode during setup.
• The laser units are heavy. Without the lasers installed, the two-laser unit weighs approximately
13 kg, the three-laser unit weighs approximately 27 kg, and the three-laser unit EX weighs
approximately 24 kg, the four-laser module A weighs approximately 43 kg. Do not attempt to lift laser
units unassisted.
• The laser manual must be provided to the user.
CAUTION
The four-laser module A is designed to be used on top of the four-laser PS rack. The laser unit
is so heavy that it can injure the human body when dropped. To avoid injury, be careful not to
accidentally push the four-laser unit off the four-laser module PS rack.
1-93
Chapter 5 Laser Unit
5.1 Overview of the Laser Units
A laser unit is a base device to mount laser devices. It introduces laser beam to the illuminator unit (the TIRF
illuminator unit, the motorized TIRF illuminator unit, or the photo activation illuminator unit) through an optical
fiber. A single-mode fiber is used to connect the laser unit and the illuminator unit.
One two-laser unit, two three-laser units, and one four-laser module are available. Use any laser unit with an
optical fiber. Use any of the four-laser modules suitable for your application.
* Various lasers can be mounted onto the laser unit.

See “Table 5.1-1 Mountable lasers” on the next page for mountable lasers.
L2
L3 L1
L3 L1
L2
(4)
(6)
L1 L2
(5)
(2) (2)
(5)
(3) (2)
(5)
(1)
(1) (4)
(4)
C-LU2 two-laser unit C-LU3 three-laser unit C-LU3EX three-laser unit EX
(13)
(7) (15)
L3
(8) (12)
L4
L1
L2 (9) (11) (10) (14)
(4)
L4 L3 L2 L1 POWER

LU4A four-laser module A
Figure 5.1-1
1-94
C-LU2 two-laser unit

This unit can mount two lasers. To control the laser intensity, insert or remove the two ND filters in front of
each laser head. A motorized shutter is provided for each laser and can be controlled on the TI-LUSU shutter
unit.
C-LU3 three-laser unit

This unit can mount three lasers. To control the laser intensity, insert or remove the two ND filters in front of
each laser head. A motorized shutter is provided for each laser and can be controlled on the TI-LUSU shutter
unit.
C-LU3EX three-laser unit EX

This unit can mount three lasers. To control the laser intensity, rotate the brightness adjustment knob in front
of each laser head. A motorized shutter is provided for each laser and can be controlled on software or the
TI-LUSU shutter unit. Besides, the optional Ar wavelength selector unit can select the laser wavelength from
488 nm and 514 nm.
If the AOM unit (option) is installed, laser beam can be adjusted by the software.

This unit can mount four lasers. To control the laser intensity, perform the AOTF on the software. A motorized
shutter is provided for each laser and can be opened or closed on software or the TI-LUSU shutter unit.
Table 5.1-1 Mountable lasers

Mountable position
Device C-LU3EX
C-LU2 two-laser C-LU3 three-laser LU4A four-laser
three-laser unit
unit unit module A
EX
1
Manufacturer: Melles Griot *
56 RCS series (56RCS/S2780) L1 (a) L1 (a) L1 (f) L2
400 to 410 nm (36 mW)
1
56 RCS series (56RCS/S2781) L1 (a) L1 (a) L1 (f) L2
440 to 445 nm (20 mW)
1
Manufacturer: Coherent *
CUBE series (CUBE405) — — — L2 (n)
405±5 nm (50, 100 mW)
1
Manufacturer: Coherent * L2 (i)
CUBE series (CUBE405) — — — (Only for N-STORM
405±5 nm (100 mW) microscopy)
1
CUBE series (CUBE445) — — — L2 (n)
445±5 nm (40 mW)
Manufacturer: Melles Griot

IMA101series L2
L1 L2 L3
IMA 101040 ALS, IMA 101065 ALS (457, 514 nm only)
457 to 514 nm (40, 65 mW)
1
L3 (k)
IMA101 series
— — — (Only for N-STORM
IMA 101065 ALS
microscopy)
457 to 514 nm (65 mW)
1-95
Mountable position
Device C-LU3EX
three-laser unit
unit unit module A
EX
Manufacturer: Spectra Physics
163 series (163-C02) L1 L2 L2 L3
457 to 514 nm (40 mW)

163 series (163-C12) L1 L2 L2 L3
488 nm (25 mW)

161C-030 L1 L2 L2 L3
488 nm (10 mW)
1
85BCD series (85BCD010,
L1 (c) L2 (c) L2 (c) L3 (c)
85BCD020, 85BCD030)
488±0.5 nm (10, 20, 30 mW)
1
Sapphire 488 LP series
L1 (c) L2 (c) L2 (c) L3 (c)
488±2 nm (10, 20, 25, 30, 50, 75
mW)
1
Sapphire 488HP series (heatsink
— — — L3 (o)
supplied)
488±2 nm (100, 200 mW)
1
58GCB020 L2 (g) L3 (g) L3 (g) —
532nm (20mW)

05LGP193 L2 L3 L3 L4
543.5 nm (1 mW)
1
85YCA series (85YCA010,
L2 (b) L3 (b) L3 (b) L4
85YCA020, 85YCA025)
561 nm (10, 20, 25 mW)
1
Manufacturer: Coherent * L4 (m)
Sapphire 561 LP — — — (Only for N-STORM
561 nm (150 mW) microscopy)
Manufacturer: JDS UNIPHASE

1677P L2 L1 L1 —
594 nm (2 mW)

1125P L2 L1, L3 L1, L3 —
633 nm (5 mW)
1
56 ICS 272 L2 (a) L1 (a) L1 (f) —
635 nm (3 mW)
1
56 ICS series (56ICS/S2669) L2 (a) L1 (a) L1 (f) L1
638 nm (10 mW)
1
Manufacturer: Coherent * L1 (n)
CUBE series (CUBE640) — — — (100 mW is only for
640+2/-5 nm (40, 100 mW) N-STORM microscopy)
1-96
Mountable position
Device C-LU3EX
three-laser unit
unit unit module A
EX
1
Manufacturer: Crystalaser * L1 (h)
DL647-100 — — — (Only for N-STORM
647±1 nm (90 mW) microscopy)
*1: A laser adapter is required for attachment.
Table 5.1-2
Adapter list
(a) MXA22068 (C-LAR/LD laser adapter)
(b) MXA22069 (C-LAR532/561 laser adapter)
(c) MXA22070 (C-LAR488 laser adapter)
(d) MXA22071 (C-LAR405 laser adapter)
(e) MXA22043 (C1-LAR408 laser adapter R)
(f) MXA22044 (C1-LAS408 laser adapter S)
(g) MXA22098 (C-LAR/532 laser adapter)
(h) MXA22111 (647 CR laser adapter)
(i) MXA22115 (405 C N-STORM laser adapter) (for N-STORM microscopy)
(k) MXA22116 (457 M N-STORM laser adapter) (for N-STORM microscopy)
(m) MXA22117 (561 C N-STORM laser adapter) (for N-STORM microscopy)
(n) Special adapter
(o) Special adapter
1-97
(1) ND filter slider (C-LU2, C-LU3)

IN: Push in Table 5.1-3
OUT: Pull out
ND4 ND8 Brightness
OUT OUT 1
IN OUT 1/4
OUT IN 1/8 IN: In optical path
Figure 5.1-2 IN IN 1/32 OUT: Not in optical path
(2) Light control knob (C-LU3EX only)

Step Mark on the knob Continuous
control range control range
You can control the light intensity of each laser in 11 steps
or on a continuous basis.
The table below shows the guideline of transmittance for
the Ar laser on a continuous basis control.
Table 5.1-4
Transmittance (%)
Unavailable range
100 80 50 25 10 3.5 1.3 0.5 0.15 0.05 0.02
Figure 5.1-3 In the unavailable range in the right figure, the laser beam
is not emitted.
(3) Ar wavelength selector (Optional for C-LU3EX)
The wavelength of the Ar laser is switchable (488 nm or
514 nm).
(4) Single mode fiber lead-in section
This is provided to connect to a single mode fiber.
(5) TI-LUSU shutter unit connector
This connector is provided to connect the cable for the
TI-LUSU shutter unit.
(6) AOM connector
This connector is to connect the AOM controller
(7) Power switch
This is the main power switch of the LU4A four-laser
module A.
When this switch is pressed, power is supplied to the
primary source only. Power supply to the secondary
source is subject to the state of the remote switch (9).
(8) AC inlet
(9) Remote switch
This is the remote power switch of the LU4A four-laser
module A.
When this switch is pressed, power is supplied to the
secondary source in conjunction with the power supply to
the PC. (Always remain the power switch (1) on.) When
this switch is off, power is supplied to the secondary
source when the power switch (1) is pressed,
independently of the power supply to the PC.
This connector is used to control the shutter of the LU4A
four-laser module A. (Do not use in this system.)
1-98

This connector is used to control AOTF of the LU4A
four-laser module A. (Do not use in this system.)
CONF: Do not use in this system.
MIC: This is a connector for the interlock cable to connect
the microscope.
TIRF: This is a connector for a cable to connect the laser
safety cover.
For using the PAU system, be sure to connect a pin-jack
connector supplied with the TI－LU4SU shutter unit.
(13) LUSU connector
This is a cable to connect the TI-LU4SU shutter unit.
(14) USB connector
This connector is for a USB cable to connect a PC.
(15) LD connector
This connector is for future expansion. (Do not use in this
system. Otherwise, a malfunction occurs.)

• The laser head and the optical fiber are precisely aligned in these units.
Avoid subjecting the laser head or optical fiber to vibration or shock. Contact the distributor if
you need to remove the laser head from the unit due to laser malfunction or other reasons.
1-99
5.1.1 AOM Controller (Optional)
Adjusts the brightness control from the software when used in combination with the C-LU3EX three-laser unit
EX.
(2)
(1)
(8)
(7)
(3) (6)
(4) (5)
Figure 5.1-4 AOM Controller
(1) Power switch

This is the main power switch of the AOM controller.
When this switch is pressed, power is supplied to the primary source only. Power supply to the
secondary source is subject to the state of the remote switch (2).
(2) Remote switch
This is the remote power switch of the AOM controller.
When this switch is pressed, power is supplied to the secondary source in conjunction with the power
supply to the PC. The power switch (1) must always be ON.
When this switch is off, power is supplied to the secondary source when the power switch (1) is pressed,
(3) AC inlet
(4) C1-SYNC connector (Do not use in this system.)
This connector is used to input sync signal.
(5) PC connector
This connector is used to control the AOM.
(6) LD PWR2 connector (for new AOM) or LD-MOD connector (for conventional AOM) (not used)
(7) LD PWR connector (for new AOM) or LD-PWR connector (for conventional AOM)
This connector is used for the brightness control of LD.
(8) AOM connector
This connector is used for driving the AOM.
1-100
The EMISSION key switch (3) on the front panel turns on/off the laser power. The power switch (4) on the rear
panel supplies the power to the system. The laser is emitted when the power switch (4) on the rear panel and
the EMISSION switch (3) on the front panel are both set on. In the normal usage condition, the power switch
(4) and the 15A breaker (7), and the 5A breaker (8) are set on.
(1) (2)
(3)
(Front view)
(5)
(4) (6)
(7) (8)
(9)
(10)
(12)
(13) (11)
(Rear view)
Figure 5.1-5

The LED turns on when lasing occurs.
The LED turns on when the system is energized.
The LED color changes depending on the system status.
Orange: Only the four-laser PS rack control system is energized. No laser is turned on. (Standby
status)
Green: The four-laser PS rack control system and all lasers are energized.
1-101

The switch turns on lasers and emits lasers.
The key is in vertical position ( O ): The lasers stop emitting and the key can be extracted.
The key is in horizontal position ( I ): The lasers start emitting.
(4) Power switch
This is the main switch of the LU-LR four-laser PS rack.
When turning on this switch only, the laser does not start firing.
The connector is used to disable the remote interlock function. When the connector is open, no laser
emits (remote interlock status). To disable the remote interlock function, attach the provided interlock
jumper connector.
(6) Cooling fan
The fan cools the power supply devices in the LU-LR four-laser PS rack. When lasers are energized, the
fan starts.
The breaker protects over-current of the LU-LR four-laser PS rack controller and the Ar laser power
supply. Normally it is turned on.
The breaker protects over-current of the lasers other than Ar laser. Normally it is turned on.
(9) Caution label
The inlet supplies power to the LU-LR four-laser PS rack controller and the Ar laser.
When no power is supplied to the inlet, the four-laser PS rack does not work.
CAUTION
• Use a power cable that satisfies the power ratings of the AC inlet and the safety standard of
the country.

The inlet supplies power to lasers other than the Ar laser.
CAUTION
the country.
1-102
5.2 C-LU2 Two-laser Unit, and C-LU3 Three-laser Unit

The setup procedures for two-laser unit and three-laser unit are given below.
1. Preparation
2. Laser installation
3. Laser rough adjustment
4. Final adjustment for transmitting Ar laser light through the optical fiber
5. Final adjustment for transmitting He-Ne laser and 405 nm laser light through the optical fiber
6. Attaching the sheet metal covers
5.2.1 Preparation
1 Checking accessories
Confirm that the following accessories have been provided:

• Cable (×1)
• Hexagonal head screws (×3)
• Harness bands (×6)
• Harness band retainers (×4)
• Label (×1)
• Black rings of sponge (×2)
2 Removing sheet metal covers
Remove the screws and detach the sheet metal covers.
ND filter ND filter
Top sheet metal

Top sheet cover
metal cover
Side sheet metal

Side sheet
cover
metal cover
Adjuster Adjuster
C-LU2 two-laser unit C-LU3 three-laser unit
Figure 5.2-1
1-103
5.2.2 Laser Installation
Install the lasers shown in the table described in “5.1. Overview of the Laser Units” onto the specified
positions.
1 Ar laser installation
1. Loosen the screw on the mounting plate attached to the laser unit and remove the mounting plate.
Fasten it securely to the bottom of the head using the screw provided with the laser head.
2. Place the Ar laser at the specified position within the laser unit and secure temporarily using the
screw above.
2 He-Ne laser installation
1. Loosen the sleeve-retaining screws (3 locations) and slot-tightening screw (1 location) to allow
insertion of the laser head.
2. Insert the front edge of the laser head into the two sleeves. To do this, push down the plunger
projecting from the bottom of the sleeve. To prevent leakage of scattered laser light, press the
edge of the laser head against the black ring attached to the plate just enough to compress the
ring slightly. When inserting the laser head through the sleeves, carefully insert in the slotted
sections to keep the shutter section on the laser head from catching.
3. Turn the setscrew on top of the block to adjust the laser head position to the center of the opening
in the mounting block.
3 Laser warm-up
1. Open the shutters on each laser head and check that the laser unit shutter is closed. Turn on the
lasers with both of the ND filters for each laser set to “IN.”
1-104
NOTE:
Leave the lasers turned on for approximately 10 minutes before adjusting. Making adjustments
immediately after turning on the lasers may result in shifts from adjusted levels.
Two-laser unit
Three-laser unit
Figure 5.2-2
1-105
5.2.3 Laser Rough Adjustment
Determine the position of the argon laser by using the optical axis of the farthest He-Ne laser (He-Ne1 laser in
Figure 5.2-3 or in Figure 5.2-4) as the reference. Align the lasers so that their laser beams can be transmitted
through the optical fiber for the excitation light.
1 Setting up the dichroic mirror centering tool
Remove the dichroic mirrors and mount the dichroic mirror centering tool (see Figure 5.2-5). Install the
lasers so that their incident points are on the tool.
He-Ne1
Remove the
dichroic mirrors
Ar
Figure 5.2-3
He-Ne2
Ar
Remove
the dichroic
mirrors.
He-Ne1
Figure 5.2-4
Pinhole for mounting Dichroic mirror centering tool

the dichroic mirror
centering tool
After the dichroic mirror of the He-Ne2 laser

has been removed
Figure 5.2-5
1-106
2 Adjusting the lasers
Adjustment of the argon laser

1. Mount the dichroic mirror centering tool in place of the dichroic mirror for the argon laser (see
Figures 5.2-5 and 5.2-6).
2. Open the shutter for the argon laser.
3. To adjust the laser beam in the horizontal direction, aim the laser beam to the Hole L on the
centering tool by moving the laser body in the range of clearance of the mounting plate. And then
fix the laser body. To adjust the laser beam in the vertical direction, change the vertical position of
the Hole L on the centering tool. The vertical position can be adjusted by rotating the lower part
while holding the upper part of the centering tool. (See Figure 5.2-7.)
4. After adjustment, tighten the four hexagonal socket-head bolts on the argon laser.
5. Close the shutter for the argon laser.
Dichroic mirror centering tool
1mm
Shutter
Hole L Hole R
1) Hold to prevent
movement
Adjust the height of

the dichroic mirror
centering tool.
2) Rotate here while
holding the upper
section to adjust the
height
Adjustment of the He-Ne laser

Shutter Rubber cap Do not change the height of the dichroic mirror centering
tool after the adjustment of the argon laser. Mount the
centering tool onto one of the positions of dichroic mirrors
for He-Ne lasers as shown in Figure 5.2-9. Adjust the
He-Ne laser beam settings respectively.
1. Open the shutter for the He-Ne laser.
(There is a red rubber cap at the tip of the optical fiber
for the excitation light. Take the cap and put it
between the shutter and the sheet metal cover to
keep the shutter open. See Figure 5.2-8.)
2. The mounting hardware at the rear of the He-Ne
laser should be fixed at the center. Aim the laser
beam to the Hole L on the centering tool by adjusting
Sheet metal cover the adjustment screws of the mounting hardware at
Figure 5.2-8 the front of the He-Ne laser. The tolerance of the
positioning is 0.2 mm or better.
3. Close the shutter for the He-Ne laser.
1-107
4. For the three-laser unit, repeat the procedure above to adjust another He-Ne laser.
Adjust only the mounting hardware at the front

Shutter to align the laser beam to the centering tool.
Dichroic mirror
centering tool
He-Ne2
Figure 5.2-9
3 Installing the dichroic mirror for the He-Ne laser
As shown in Figure 5.2-10, install the dichroic mirror for

each He-Ne laser. (Do not attach the dichroic mirror for the
argon laser.)
Adjust the dichroic • For the three-laser unit, the dichroic mirror for the
mirror to align with
the centering tool. He-Ne laser located farthest from that for the argon
laser has a total reflection surface, while the middle
dichroic mirror has a green reflection surface.
• For the two-laser unit, the dichroic mirror for the He-Ne
laser located farthest from that for the argon laser has a
total reflection surface.
Dichroic mirror
centering tool
Figure 5.2-10
1-108
4 Adjusting the angle of the dichroic mirror for the He-Ne laser
Mount the dichroic mirror centering tool in place of the

dichroic mirror for the argon laser again. Change the
Hexagonal socket- direction of the centering tool and adjust the angle of the
head bolts a1 dichroic mirror for the He-Ne laser located at the far side
from the argon laser. (See Figure 5.2-11.) Align the beam
of the He-Ne laser with the Hole R on the centering tool.
a2
Setscrews b1 (See Figure 5.2-7.)
1. For horizontal adjustment, slightly loosen hexagonal
b2 socket-head bolts a1, insert a screwdriver or thin
stick into a2 to permit tilting, then rotate the entire
mirror.
For vertical adjustment, slightly loosen setscrews b1,
insert a screwdriver or thin stick into b2 to permit
tilting, then rotate the entire mirror.
b2 b1 2. When the dichroic mirror is properly angled, tighten
a1
a2 hexagonal socket-head bolts a1 and setscrews b1 to
secure the mirror in place.
(Simultaneous tightening of the two screws
minimizes positional deviation.)
3. Adjust the accuracy of the dichroic mirror angle within
±0.2 mm from centering tool hole R. (Make the
Figure 5.2-11
adjustment carefully, to ensure smooth entry of the
laser beam into the optical-fiber cable.)
For the three-laser unit, the adjustment of the dichroic
mirror for the He-Ne1 laser will be made in the final
adjustment , rather than at this step.
5 Setting up the dichroic mirror for the argon laser
Mount the dichroic mirror for the argon laser on the argon laser section. This dichroic mirror has a blue
reflection surface.
1-109
6 Centering the He-Ne laser
As shown in Figure 5.2-12, place the target tool at a distance of about 50 cm from the coupler. To
perform adjustment of the target tool, move its pinhole so that the beam of the He-Ne laser (He-Ne2
with the three-laser unit, He-Ne1 with the two-laser unit) farthest from the argon laser is aligned with the
pinhole of the target tool. The pinhole used for centering should be slightly narrower than the laser
beam. The centering accuracy should be within 0.1 mm.
The target tool position can be adjusted with the two setscrews. The setup condition of the target tool
varies by installation location. When selecting a location, make sure that the laser beam can reach the
target tool.
3) Adjust the dichroic He-Ne2

mirror for the
He-Ne1 laser and
align with the Ar
pinhole
2) Adjust the
dichroic mirror for
the argon laser
and align with the
pinhole
He-Ne1
Centering screw
1) Target tool
50 cm Align the pinhole Pinhole
position with the
He-Ne2 laser beam
Target tool
Figure 5.2-12
7 Centering the argon laser beam
Align the argon laser beam with the pinhole of the target tool that has been adjusted with the He-Ne2
laser.
Adjust the dichroic mirror for the argon laser so that the argon laser beam aligns with the pinhole of the
target tool that has been adjusted with the He-Ne2 laser. The accuracy should be within 0.4 mm.
WARNING
Do not look directly at the incident laser light during adjustment.
1-110
8 Centering the He-Ne1 laser beam in the middle
If the He-Ne1 laser is located in the middle of the enclosure, adjust its dichroic mirror so that the
He-Ne1 laser beam aligns with the pinhole of the target tool set in the previous step. The accuracy
should be within 0.8 mm.
9 Checking the screws
Make sure that all the dichroic mirror adjustment screws are firmly tightened.
10 Aligning polarization of lasers

This section describes how to align the direction of polarization of the He-Ne laser with reference to that
of the argon laser. (See Figure 5.2-13.)
1. Place a polarizer-equipped tool at the end of the argon-laser dichroic mirror.
At this time, place the polarizer-equipped tool with its flat surface at the back, as shown in Figure
5.2-13.
2. Place a light-scattering target (such as paper) at the end of the coupler and then move the knob
on the polarizer-equipped tool to determine the position at which the laser beam is the darkest. (At
this time, remove the two ND filters from the argon laser. This will make it easier to locate the
darkest position.)
At this time, the direction of polarization of the argon laser is as shown in Figure 5.2-13.
3. Place a light-scattering target (such as paper) at the end of the fiber mount and then rotate the
He-Ne laser to determine the position at which the laser beam is the darkest. (At this time, remove
the two ND filters from the He-Ne laser. This will make it easier to locate the darkest position.) At
this time, the polarizer must be oriented in the same direction as that of the argon laser.
At this time, the direction of polarization of the He-Ne laser is as shown in Figure 5.2-13, where the
polarization directions of argon laser and He-Ne laser are aligned. Adjust carefully within the
range of approximately ±2 degrees. (A discussion of the direction of laser polarization is included
in the laser instruction manual. Refer to the manual for rough configuration of the lasers. This will
make it easier to determine the direction of polarization.)
4. For two He-Ne lasers system, adjust the polarization direction of the second laser in the same
manner.
5. Rotating the He-Ne laser may displace it from the pinhole of the target tool adjusted as directed in
“6 Centering the He-Ne laser” in this section. If this occurs, adjust the setscrews L1 and R1
provided at the He-Ne laser radiation side as shown in Figure 5.2-13 to align the laser with the
target.
1-111
L1 R1
He-Ne2
Polarizer-equipped tool
(Push the tool until its Ar
edge surface touches
the dichroic mirror.)
Adjusting screw
on the incoming
laser side
Adjusting screw He-Ne1
on the fiber
Coupler
A R1 L1
Target (such as paper) B
Rotate polarizer so that the argon
Direction of laser becomes darker.
polarization
of polarizer Direction of polarization of laser
Figure 5.2-13
11 Laser intensity measurement

At first, maximize each laser intensity. Move off all of movable ND filters from the optical path and
adjust Argon laser to its maximum power. Measure and record the light intensity of each laser emitting
from the coupler with a calibrated laser intensity power meter.
This completes the rough setup of the lasers.
1-112
5.2.4 Final Adjustment for the Ar Laser Light with the Optical Fiber
1 Centering the Ar laser
Align the Ar laser beam with the coupler centering tool pinhole.
1. Loosen the clamping screw on the coupler unit.
Figure 5.2-14
2. Set the coupler centering tool pinhole in the laser

incident direction, place a paper on the emission
side, and adjust the H and V laser incidence side
adjustment screws to find the point giving maximum
brightness.
Laser incidence side adjustment screw
Figure 5.2-15
3. Set the coupler centering tool pinhole in the direction

of laser emission and adjust the H and V fiber side
brightness.
Fiber side adjustment screw
Figure 5.2-16
4. Repeat steps 2. and 3. two or three times to find the

point of maximum brightness.
1-113
2 Attaching the fiber coupling
1. Close all laser shutters.

2. Tighten the three screws and attach the fiber
coupling unit. Since this will be rotated at a
subsequent step, do not tighten excessively at this
time. Tighten so that the units can still be rotated by
inserting the tool in the tool opening.
Make sure that the key slot in the fiber coupling is at
the bottom (different from EX).
Handle the coupling carefully to keep out debris.
Figure 5.2-17
3 Transmitting Ar laser light through the fiber
WARNING
Never look directly at the fiber tip. Always monitor laser emissions by aiming the tip down
onto a sheet of paper.
1. Carefully align the end of the fiber (the end without

the tag) with the key slot in the coupling and insert as
far as it will go. Tighten the fiber connector.
Gradually tighten, stopping when light is first emitted
from the tip of the fiber.
Figure 5.2-18
2. If no light is emitted from the end of the fiber in step

1., loosen the fiber connector approximately 10
degrees, gradually pull out the fiber, and observe
whether light is emitted. (Light is emitted more easily
if defocused.)
If this is not effective, repeat the steps of loosening
the connector and pulling the fiber a couple of times.
Figure 5.2-19
1-114
3. If even a small amount of laser light is observed,

adjust the two fiber side adjustment screws on the
coupling to find the point at which the Ar laser light
increases in intensity. (Final fine adjustment will be
performed after adjusting the polarizing orientation.)
4. Gradually tighten the fiber connector. Stop just before

the point at which light is no longer emitted. Now
adjust the two fiber side adjustment screws to find the
Figure 5.2-20 point giving a maximum light intensity. Repeat this
procedure to ensure a maximum intensity, checking
to confirm that the fiber connector is tightened.
5. If no light is emitted even after repeating these steps,

repeat the procedure from step1 in Section 5.2.4,
“Final Adjustment for the Ar Laser Light with the
Optical Fiber.”
6. Tighten the fiber connector at the point giving a

maximum Ar laser light brightness. Check that there
is no play in the fiber.
7. Close the Ar laser shutter.
1-115
4 Adjusting the fiber polarizing orientation
1. Align the knob on the polarizer-equipped tool with the

index. Mount the polarizer-equipped tool on the
polarizing orientation adjustment tool with the knob at
the top.
Figure 5.2-21
2. Clamp the emission end of the optical fiber to the

polarizing orientation adjustment tool. Place a
light-scattering target (such as paper) before it.
Position the fiber so that it is not subjected to
excessive force, and so that both ends are laid out
straight.
Figure 5.2-22
3. Open the Ar laser shutter. Insert a tool into the

coupling and rotate while monitoring the laser light
image on the target to find the point giving the
minimum brightness.
(If the three screws on the coupling are too tight,
loosen them slightly before rotating.)
Figure 5.2-23
4. Place the power meter in front of the polarizer to

measure the laser power.
5. Rotate the polarizer-equipped tool by 90 degrees so

that the knob faces to the side, place the power meter
in front of the polarizer, and measure laser power.
6. Check that the extinction ratio (ratio of bright to dark

laser power) is at least 20:1.
If not, repeat the adjustment procedure from step 1.
Figure 5.2-24
1-116
7. Tighten the three clamping screws on the coupling.
Figure 5.2-25
1-117
5 Adjusting to give maximum Ar laser light transmission through the fiber
1. Attach the emitter end of the optical fiber to the power

meter tool and adjust to find the point giving
maximum brightness, while measuring the brightness
on the power meter. To adjust brightness, use either
the laser incidence side H adjustment screw
(horizontal) or V adjustment screw (vertical), together
with the fiber side V adjustment screw and H
adjustment screw.
Fiber side Laser incidence As a guide to Ar laser incidence efficiency, the

adjustment side adjustment brightness at the end of the coupler should be at least
screw screw 50% of the brightness in front of the coupler.
Figure 5.2-26
(Adjustment example)
(1) Turn the laser incidence side H adjustment
screw 30 to 60 degrees in one direction.
(2) Turn the fiber side H adjustment screw in the

same direction as (1) to find the point giving a
maximum brightness.
If brightness does not increase, turn the laser
incidence side adjustment screw 30 to 60
Figure 5.2-27 degrees in the direction opposite to (1). Turn the
fiber side adjustment screw in the same
direction to find the point giving a maximum
brightness.
(3) Repeat the adjustment in step (2) to find the

point in the horizontal axis giving a maximum
brightness.
(4) Turn the laser incidence side V adjustment

screw 30 to 60 degrees. Turn the fiber side V
adjustment screw in the same direction to find
Figure 5.2-28 the point giving a maximum brightness.

point in the vertical axis giving a maximum
brightness.
(6) Repeated adjustments along the horizontal and

vertical axes may result in even greater
brightness.
2. Record the Ar laser brightness. (Note the power

meter wavelength setting.)
3. Open the other laser shutters and check that the

laser light is emitted. If no light is emitted from the
other lasers, repeat the adjustments from “6.
Centering the He-Ne laser” in “5.2.3 Laser Rough
Adjustment” in Part 1.
1-118
5.2.5 Final Adjustment for the He-Ne Laser Light and 405 Laser Light with the
Optical Fiber
1 Transmitting the He-Ne1 laser beam through the optical-fiber cable
Without touching the coupler, adjust only the laser body to transmit the laser beam through the
optical-fiber cable. (Figure 5.2-29)
Incident light efficiency of more than 50% should be achieved at the emitting end of the optical-fiber
cable relative to values measured in front of the coupler.
1. Close the shutters for the argon and He-Ne2 lasers so that only the He-Ne1 laser beam enters the
optical-fiber cable.
2. Mount the end of the optical-fiber cable onto the power meter tool and measure the light intensity
with the power meter.
3. Adjust the front and rear setscrews on either the right or the left side of the laser. (Front setscrew
R1 and rear setscrew R2 on the right side are adjusted by the following example.)
(1) Rotate the front setscrew R1 (close to the laser-emitting end) 30 to 60 degrees in either
direction.
(2) Rotate the rear setscrew R2 (on the same side as the setscrew rotated in step (1)), located
on the back of the laser, in the same direction as in step (1). Adjust the laser body position at
which the power meter indicates a greater light intensity.
(3) If light intensity does not increase, rotate the setscrews R1 and R2 (in that order) in the
opposite direction of the rotation in step (1). Adjust the laser body position at which light
intensity becomes greater.
(4) Repeat steps (2) and (3) to adjust the position at which light intensity is greatest.
4. Adjust the front and rear setscrews on the other side of the laser and locate the laser body position
at which light intensity is greatest. (Front setscrew L1 and rear setscrew L2 on the left side, in this
example.)
5. When setscrews R1 and R2 are adjusted again, the light intensity may be further increased.
6. Record the light intensity.
He-Ne2
Ar
He-Ne1
Setscrew L1 Setscrew L2
Rotate screw R1 first. Rotate R2 after R1 and in

Note the rotating direction the same direction as R1
and turning angle.
Figure 5.2-29
1-119
2 Transmitting the He-Ne2 laser beam through the optical-fiber cable
As with the He-Ne1 laser, adjust the He-Ne2 laser body position to transmit the laser beam at maximum
light intensity through the optical-fiber cable.
At this time, close the shutters for the argon and He-Ne1 laser so that only the He-Ne2 laser beam
enters the optical-fiber cable.
Incident light efficiency of about 50% should be achieved at the emitting end of the optical-fiber cable
relative to values measured in front of the coupler.
Record the light intensity.
3 Attaching the He-Ne laser to the holder
1. While pressing the sleeve against the sleeve-mounting section, lightly tighten the slot-tightening
screw.
During this process, light intensity may decrease slightly. Work carefully, while monitoring the light
intensity at the end of the optical-fiber cable on the power meter.
2. Tighten the front and rear sleeve-retaining screws of each laser.
Sleeve-mounting section Sleeve-retaining screw

Sleeve Slot-tightening screw
He-Ne2
Ar
Figure 5.2-30
4 Laser intensity measurement
At first, maximize each laser intensity. Move off all of movable ND filters from the optical path and
adjust Argon laser to its maximum power. Measure and record the light intensity of each laser emitting
from the optical fiber with a calibrated laser intensity power meter.
5 Handling of cables and codes.
Fix cables and codes with bundling band.
1-120
5.2.6 Attaching the Sheet Metal Covers
Install the sheet metal covers.
This completes the laser adjustment.
1-121
5.3 C-LU3EX Three-laser Unit EX

The setup procedure for the three-laser unit EX is given below.
1. Preparation
2. Laser Installation
3. Laser Rough Adjustment 1
4. Laser Rough Adjustment 2
5. Final Adjustment for the Ar Laser Light with the Optical Fiber
6. Final Adjustment for the He-Ne Laser Light and 405 Laser Light with the Optical Fiber
7. Adjusting the AOM Controller (When the AOM Unit Used Only)
8. Attaching the Sheet Metal Cover
1-122
5.3.1 Preparation
Confirm that the following accessories have been

provided:
• Cable (×2)
• Hexagonal head screws (×7)
• Harness bands (×6)
• Harness band retainers (×4)
• Label (×1)
Figure 5.3-1 • Black rings of sponge (×2)
2 Knob position adjustment
Turn the light control knob (white line) to the MAX position
on the stepped scale.
Figure 5.3-2
3 Removing the sheet metal cover
Remove the six screws and the sheet metal cover.
Figure 5.3-3
1-123
4 Attaching the black rings (provided)
1. Remove the bolts and nuts attached at three

locations on the laser mounting position opening,
holding them to avoid dropping them.
Figure 5.3-4
2. Attach the black (sponge) rings provided, centering

them on the opening.
Figure 5.3-5
5 Removing the fiber coupling
Remove the three external screws and remove the fiber

coupling. Handle the coupling carefully to prevent
contamination of the space inside.
Figure 5.3-6
1-124
He-Ne laser
405 laser
(cylindrical type) Ar laser
Overall laser unit diagram DSCN103

Figure 5.3-7
1 Installing the Ar laser
1. Detach the mounting plate from the laser unit.

2. Attach the mounting plate to the Ar laser.
Note that the mounting plate screw positions differ
for the 488 multi-line Ar (black) and 488 single-line
Ar (white).
• Front three holes: 488 multi-line Ar
• Rear three holes: 488 single-line Ar
Figure 5.3-8
3. Place the Ar laser at the specified position in the

laser unit.
Be sure to press the laser emitter end against the
black ring just enough to compress the ring to
prevent leakage of scattered laser light. Temporarily
secure the Ar laser to the laser unit using the screws.
Attach while pressing Black ring

against the black ring just
enough to compress it.
Figure 5.3-9
4. Check that the laser head shutter is closed (at the

CLOSE position).
1-125
2 Installing the He-Ne laser and 405 laser (cylindrical type)
1. Loosen the slot-tightening screw and three

sleeve-retaining screws to allow insertion of the laser
head.
Figure 5.3-10
2. Insert the He-Ne laser head into the sleeve. To

prevent leakage of scattered laser light, press the
end of the laser head against the black ring attached
to the plate just enough to compress the ring slightly.
Make sure that the label on the He-Ne laser is facing
upward when installed.
Figure 5.3-11
3. 405 (for cylindrical type)

• Use the focus adjustment tool provided with the
laser to adjust the laser to give a minimum beam
diameter at 1.5 m to 1.7 m distance from the
emitter.
(This must be performed to increase transmission
efficiency across the fiber connection and to
ensure that the light controller is operational.)
Figure 5.3-12
• Insert the 405 laser head into the sleeve, making
sure that the emitter end adapter is pressed
against the plate. Confirm that the label on the
405 laser faces to the outer side when installed
(elliptic shaped beam is in vertically oriented).
1-126
4. Adjust the positions of the units so that the sleeve

side face aligns with each mount.
Figure 5.3-13
Figure 5.3-14
5. Check that the laser head shutters are closed (at the CLOSE position).
6. Partially tighten the slot-tightening screw and one of the three sleeve-retaining screws loosened
in step 1).
3 Installing the 408 laser (rectangular type)
1. Detach the two cylindrical laser holders.

2. Use the four screws provided to attach the C1-LAR408 laser adapter R.
3. Use the three screws provided to attach the 408 laser (rectangular type).
4 Laser warm-up
1. Turn on the lasers.

2. Allow the lasers to warm up for 10 minutes.
NOTE:
Leave the lasers turned on for approximately 10 minutes before adjusting. Making
adjustments immediately after turning on the lasers may result in shifts from adjusted
levels.
3. Set the power to minimum (Standby mode) for the Ar laser.
1-127
5.3.3 Laser Rough Adjustment 1
Beam shift unit
Light control unit
Overall view from above DSCN150

Figure 5.3-15
1 Checking the initial beam shift unit position
Check that the horizontal setscrew tool openings on the

sides of the two beam shift units are perpendicular to the
light beam, and that the cylindrical glass section is not
significantly tilted.
(They are set to these positions before shipping.)
Figure 5.3-16
Glass section
Figure 5.3-17
1-128
2 Installing the dichroic mirror centering tool (for the EX)
1. Remove the screw, then remove the three dichroic

mirror adjustment spring units. Take care to keep the
springs from flying off.
Spring unit
Figure 5.3-18
2. Remove the two screws (total 6) on each unit, then

remove the three dichroic mirror adjustment units.
Dichroic mirror adjustment unit
Figure 5.3-19
1-129
3 Adjusting the laser installation position
Adjusting the Ar laser

1. Install the dichroic mirror centering tool (for the EX)
on the Ar laser dichroic mirror unit, making sure that
the tool opening faces in the direction in which the
laser is emitted.
Dichroic mirror centering tool (for the EX)

Figure 5.3-20
2. Open the Ar laser shutter (set to OPEN position).

Open the Ar laser optical path shutter on the laser
unit. The shutter can be kept open by inserting an
Allen key here.
Figure 5.3-21
3. Adjust the rotation direction by inserting a tool into

the Ar mirror adjustment hole to vertically align the
laser beam and dichroic mirror centering tool
opening (for the EX).
Adjustment Ar mirror Clamp screw

hole unit
Figure 5.3-22
4. Move the entire Ar laser unit to horizontally align the

laser beam and dichroic mirror centering tool
opening (for the EX).
Figure 5.3-23
1-130
5. Repeat the adjustments in steps 3. and 4. until the

laser beam passes through the center of the dichroic
mirror centering tool opening (for the EX). The
centering tolerances should be within approximately
0.2 mm. Centering can be easily checked by holding
a sheet of white paper behind the tool opening.
6. On the continuous control range, turn the light

control knob to MAX. Confirm that the optical path is
Figure 5.3-24 completely clear.
After checking, return the knob to MAX in the step
control range to adjust the laser. (See 5.3.1-2)
7. Tighten the Ar mirror clamp screw and the four

mounting plate screws to clamp the Ar laser into
place.
8. Close the shutter on the laser unit.
1-131
Adjusting the He-Ne laser and 405 cylindrical laser

1. Install the dichroic mirror centering tool (for the EX)
on the dichroic mirror unit.
2. Open the shutters for the He-Ne laser and 405

cylindrical laser (Set to OPEN position). Open the
He-Ne laser optical path shutter on the laser unit.
The shutter can be kept open by inserting an Allen
key here.
3. Adjust the 405 cylindrical laser orientation so that the

beam cross-section forms an upright ellipse.
Figure 5.3-25
4. Adjust by moving the rear mount with the front mount

fixed so that the laser beam passes through the
center of the dichroic mirror centering tool opening
(for the EX). If this cannot be accomplished by
moving just the rear mount, the front mount may also
be moved.
5. On the continuous control range, turn the light control

knob to MAX. Confirm that the optical path is
Figure 5.3-26 completely clear.
After checking, return the knob to MAX in the step
control range to adjust the laser. (See step 2 in 5.3.1)
6. Tighten the two sleeve-retaining screws below the

center, leaving the sleeve-retaining screw above the
center and the slot-tightening screw loose. This
permits later adjustment of laser polarization by
rotating the entire laser. (No polarization adjustment
is required for the 405 cylindrical laser.)
The centering tolerance should be within
approximately 0.2 mm.
7. Adjust the other laser in the same way.
8. Close the shutter on the laser unit.
• When the AOM unit will not be used, this completes the rough adjustment of the lasers. Proceed
to Section 5.3.4, “Laser Rough Adjustment 2.”
1-132
4 Attaching the AOM units
1. Turn off power to all units.
2. Remove the tape covering the openings on the AOM

units.
3. Detach the two light control units at which the AOM

units will be attached, and attach the two AOM units
using three screws provided.
Standard positions for attaching the AOM units are
those of the Ar laser unit and the G-HeNe laser unit.
Figure 5.3-27
4. Detach the metal plates of the laser unit and attach

the AOM cable connectors with panels.
Figure 5.3-28
5. Connect the AOM cables to the AOM units, routing

AOM1 to the Ar laser unit and AOM2 to the Green
HeNe laser unit.
6. Wire the cables as shown in the photograph and

secure with cable retainers.
Figure 5.3-29
1-133
5 Wiring the AOM controller
1. Connect the AOM cable provided with the C1-AOM

AOM unit to the AOM connector of the AOM
controller and that of the laser unit.
AOM cable
2. Connect the PC cable supplied with the C1-AOM

AOM unit to the connector of the NI card attached to
your PC and the PC connector of the AOM
controller.
PC cable
Figure 5.3-30
6 Adjusting the AOM controller volume
1. Confirm the AOM controller power switch is turned

off, then remove the screws and the AOM controller
cover.
CAUTION
To avoid electric shock, never touch the power
supply during the adjustment work.
AOM1 AOM2 Power supply
Figure 5.3-31
2. Using the tip of a screwdriver, remove the silver caps

on the AOM driver's PWR volume (PWRADJ) and
BIAS volume (BIASADJ).
3. Insert the tip of a small screwdriver into the PWR

and BIAS volumes and slowly turn them all the way
counter-clockwise.
< for the new type of AOM >

AOM1 AOM2 The AOM controller units manufactured in and after
Figure 5.3-32 November 2008 do not have a BIAS adjustment but
a POWER adjustment.
1-134
7 Adjusting the AOM unit
1. Loosen the X-axis, Z-axis, and rotation clamp screws

on the AOM unit.
2. Open the laser shutter, and adjust along the X-and

Z-axes so that the laser beam passes through the
AOM opening. Then, turn off the power for the AOM
controller to pass the 0th-order light.
To adjust in the Z-axis direction, use the adjusting
screw with the clamp screw completely loosened.
Figure 5.3-33 The transmission ratio of after-AOM to pre-AOM
should be approximately 95%.
Rotation adjuster screw X-axis clamp screw
Z-axis clamp screw
Rotation clamp screw

X-axis clamp screw Z-axis adjuster
screw (setscrew)
Figure 5.3-34
3. Detach the laser unit front sheet metal cover.
4. Turn off the AOM controller [REMOTE] switch.

(If the [REMOTE] switch is in the ON position, the
AOM controller will be turned on automatically when
the PC is turned on. If the [REMOTE] switch is in the
OFF position, the AOM controller can be turned on
or off independent of the PC.)
1-135
5. Adjust the AOM rotation direction.
WARNING
The AOM controller is connected to the primary
power supply. Be careful to avoid touching the
primary side.
When the AOM controller is turned on, laser light

passing through the AOM unit is split into multiple
beams. The light transmitted when the AOM
controller is off is called the 0th-order light. When the
power is turned on, the 1st-order light, the 2nd-order
light, and the third-order light appear on both sides of
the 0th-order light.
Loosen the rotation direction clamp screw.
2nd-order light 2nd-order light Adjust the AOM unit rotation direction so that the
1st-order light 1st-order light
1st-order light on the left, when facing the laser
0th-order light
emitter, becomes the brightest.
Use this 1st-order light.
Place a power meter about 50 cm from the AOM unit
Figure 5.3-35 so that it is struck only by the 1st-order light.
Before measuring the 1st-order light, check the

position of the 0th-order light with the AOM controller
turned off.
The brightness may increase slightly when the beam
opening of the AOM unit is finely adjusted in the X
and Z directions.
Use the 1st-order light for all subsequent

adjustments.
6. Carefully tighten the clamp screws of the AOM unit in

the X, Z, and rotation directions.
Figure 5.3-36
1-136
8 Adjusting the AOM driver
PWR adjustment - for the conventional AOM

1. Connect each part, then set the laser power to 100%
on NIS-Elements.
2. Measure the 1st-order light intensity using the power

meter to determine the maximum brightness.
Insert a fine screwdriver (like the screwdriver
provided with the PCI-6711) into the PWR volume
and turn it clockwise very slowly.
The maximum brightness will be achieved almost
immediately for Ar lasers. G-HeNe lasers will require
a small amount of rotation, and R-HeNe lasers
somewhat more.
Figure 5.3-37
3. Turn the PWR volume counter-clockwise from the position of the maximum brightness.
For Ar and G-HeNe lasers, reduce to approximately 98% of the maximum brightness. For
R-HeNe lasers, reduce to approximately 80% of the maximum brightness.
PWR adjustment should be finalized where the volume is turned in the clockwise direction. To
make fine adjustments, briefly rotate the volume counter-clockwise, then slowly turn it back in the
clockwise direction.
(This adjustment is required to prevent too much power from being applied to the AOM
elements.)
Stop at the limit position if the brightness does not fall to 98% when the volume is turned fully
counter-clockwise for the Ar laser.
4. Perform BIAS adjustment of AOM driver.

• Record the brightness when the laser power is set to 100%.
• Set the laser power to 50% on NIS-Elements., then turn BIAS volume counter-clockwise to
reduce the brightness to half.
5. For multiple AOMs, perform PWR adjustments for other Ar lasers.
This completes the conventional AOM adjustment.
Next, proceed to Section 5.3.4, “Laser Rough Adjustment 2” using the 1st-order light from each
laser.
1-137
PWR adjustment - for the new AOM

New AOM (Checkpoint: the nameplate on the front indicates NIKON only. and the serial number on
the nameplate is 59001 or higher)
1. Connect each part, then set the laser power to 100% on NIS-Elements.
2. Measure the 1st-order light intensity using the power meter to determine the maximum
brightness.
Insert a fine screwdriver (like the screwdriver provided with the PCI-6711) into the PWR volume
and turn it clockwise very slowly.
The maximum brightness will be achieved almost immediately for Ar lasers. G-HeNe lasers will
require a small amount of rotation, and R-HeNe lasers somewhat more.
3. Turn the PWR volume counter-clockwise from the position of the maximum brightness.
For Ar and G-HeNe lasers, reduce to approximately 98% of the maximum brightness. For
R-HeNe lasers, reduce to approximately 80% of the maximum brightness.
PWR adjustment should be finalized where the volume is turned in the clockwise direction. To
make fine adjustments, lightly rotate the volume counter-clockwise, then slowly turn it back in the
clockwise direction.
(This adjustment is required to prevent too much power from being applied to the AOM
elements.)
Stop at the limit position if the brightness does not fall to 98% when the volume is turned fully
counter-clockwise for the Ar laser.
4. Perform BIAS volume of AOM driver.

• Check that BIAS adjustment is turned anti-clockwise.
• Set the laser power to 0% on NIS-Elements.
Turn BIAS adjustment clockwise to the minimum brightness.
5. For multiple AOMs, perform PWR adjustments for other Ar lasers.
This completes the new AOM adjustment.
Next, proceed to Section 5.3.4, “Laser Rough Adjustment 2” using the 1st-order light from each
laser.
1-138
1 Attaching the dichroic mirror adjustment unit
1. Attach the three dichroic mirror adjustment units,

aligning the pin positions and partially tightening the
two screws on each unit.
The following color mirrors are attached for each
laser:
• L1 (405, 633): Violet
• L2 (488): Blue
• L3 (543): Total reflection
Figure 5.3-38
2. Attach the spring units while pressing them against

the side of the dichroic mirror adjustment unit.
Press
Figure 5.3-39
3. Rotate the dichroic mirror adjustment unit by hand to

check that it rotates smoothly. If the lower face of the
dichroic mirror adjustment unit does not contact the
laser unit, the rotation will not be smooth.
1-139
2 Adjusting the Ar dichroic mirror adjustment unit angle

(The dichroic mirror adjustment unit adjusts the laser angle.)
1. Place the dichroic mirror centering tool (for the EX) in

front of the fiber coupling.
Figure 5.3-40
2. Loosen the two horizontal rotation clamp screws of

the Ar dichroic mirror adjustment unit.
Figure 5.3-41
3. Adjust the horizontal axis setscrews and align the

horizontal axis of the laser light with the tool opening
position.
If the AOM is attached, first turn off the AOM
controller and check the zero-order light position.
Always check that the first-order (strong) light is
aligned with the hole in the tool. Check that the
first-order light is used for subsequent adjustments.
Figure 5.3-42 Check that the first-order light is used for subsequent
adjustments.
4. Loosen the Ar dichroic mirror adjustment unit vertical

clamp screw.
The L1 and L3 clamp screws are spring plungers.
(On products manufactured after May 2004)
Unscrew the screws by approximately 90° from the
fully-tightened position to tension the spring.
Figure 5.3-43
1-140
5. Adjust the vertical axis setscrew and align the

vertical axis of the laser light with the tool opening
position.
Figure 5.3-44
6. Carefully tighten the horizontal clamp screws.
Figure 5.3-45
7. If the beam becomes misaligned from the center

after tightening, fine-adjust the vertical setscrew to
align the beam with the tool opening.
8. Carefully tighten the vertical clamp screw.
This completes the adjustment of the Ar dichroic mirror adjustment unit.
1-141
3 Removing the front sheet metal cover
Remove the three screws and remove the front sheet

metal cover.
Figure 5.3-46
4 Coarse-adjusting the angle of the other two dichroic mirror adjustment units
1. As a target, prepare a card on which crosshairs are

drawn.
Place the target at least 50 cm from the fiber
attachment unit, aim the Ar laser, and clamp it at the
position at which the beam strikes the center of the
target.
Figure 5.3-47
2. Using the procedure in Section 2, “Adjusting the Ar

dichroic mirror adjustment unit angle”, adjust the
dichroic mirror adjustment units vertically and
horizontally so that the beams from the other two
lasers also roughly coincide with the target.
1-142
5 Adjust the laser polarization orientations (except for 405 laser)
1. Place the polarizer-equipped tool in front of the fiber

coupling with the index facing forward.
2. Open the Ar laser shutter to emit the Ar laser only.
3. Place a white paper behind the fiber coupling and

move the polarizer knob to provide minimum light
transmission.
Figure 5.3-48
4. Open the shutters for and emit the other two lasers.
5. Rotate the laser heads for these two lasers to find

the position that gives the darkest results. Do not
alter the polarizer orientation from the position
determined for the Ar laser.
Figure 5.3-49
6. Tighten the slot-tightening screws (1 each) on the

two other lasers after adjusting the polarizer
orientation, then tighten one sleeve-clamping screw
above the center.
Figure 5.3-50
Figure 5.3-51
7. Remove the polarizer-equipped tool.
1-143
6 Fine-adjusting the angle of the other two dichroic mirror adjustment units and adjusting the
beam shift unit
1. Adjust the angle of the dichroic mirror adjustment

unit and align the He-Ne laser beam position with the
target positioned at a distance of 50 cm.
Since the cross-section of the 405 cylindrical laser
beam is upright elliptical, estimate a center point and
use this for alignment.
Figure 5.3-52
1-144
2. Adjust the beam shift unit to align the positions of the

other laser beams with the position of the Ar laser
beam scattered by the mirror reflector in front of the
fiber coupling.
Adjust horizontally either by rotating the beam shift
unit by hand or by inserting an Allen wrench in the
side and turning the horizontal axis setscrew.
Adjust vertically by moving the vertical axis setscrew
Mirror reflector up or down with the clamp screw loosened.
Figure 5.3-53
Horizontal axis setscrew

Figure 5.3-54
Vertical axis setscrew Vertical axis clamp

(farther from axis A) screw
Axis A
Figure 5.3-55
3. Repeat steps 1. and 2. to make the light from the

three lasers coincide with the Ar laser beam position
on the mirror reflecting surface and the target
position at a distance of 50 cm.
(Take enough time to perform this step thoroughly.
Getting the laser beams to coincide here will make it
easier to adjust transmission into the optical fiber.)
1-145
The Ar laser beam is aligned with the coupler centering tool pinhole.
1. Loosen the clamp screw on the coupler unit.
Clamp screw (center)
Figure 5.3-56
2. Set the coupler centering tool pinhole in the laser

incident direction, place a card on the emission side,
and adjust the H and V laser incidence side
brightness.
Laser incidence side adjustment screw
Figure 5.3-57
3. Set the coupler centering tool pinhole in the direction

of laser emission and adjust the H and V fiber side
brightness.
Fiber side adjustment screw
Figure 5.3-58
4. Repeat steps 2. and 3. two or three times to find the

point of maximum brightness.
1-146

2. Tighten the three screws and attach the fiber
coupling unit. Since this will be rotated at a
subsequent step, do not tighten excessively at this
time. Tighten so that the units can still be rotated by
inserting the tool in the tool opening.
Make sure that the key slot in the fiber coupling is on
top.
Handle the coupling carefully to keep out debris.
Figure 5.3-59
WARNING
Never look directly at the fiber tip. Always monitor laser emissions by aiming the tip down onto a sheet
of paper.
1. Carefully align the end of the fiber (the end without

the tag) with the key slot in the coupling and insert as
far as it will go. Tighten the fiber connector.
Gradually tighten, stopping when light is first emitted
from the tip of the fiber.
Figure 5.3-60
2. If no light is emitted from the end of the fiber in step

1., loosen the fiber connector approximately 10
degrees, gradually pull out the fiber, and observe
whether light is emitted. (Light is emitted more easily
if defocused.)
If this is not effective, repeat the steps of loosening
the connector and pulling the fiber a couple of times.
Figure 5.3-61
1-147
3. If even a small amount of laser light is observed,

adjust the two fiber side adjustment screws on the
coupling to find the point at which the Ar laser light
increases in intensity.
(Final fine adjustment will be performed after
adjusting the polarizing orientation.)
4. Gradually tighten the fiber connector. Stop just

before the point at which the light emission is
Figure 5.3-62 extinguished. Now adjust the two fiber side
adjustment screws to find the point giving a
maximum light intensity. Repeat this procedure to
ensure a maximum intensity with the fiber connector
tightened.
5. If no light is emitted even after repeating these steps,

repeat the procedure from step1 in Section 5.3.5
“Final Adjustment for the Ar Laser Light with the
Optical Fiber.”
6. Tighten the fiber connector at the point giving a

maximum Ar laser light brightness. Check that there
is no play in the fiber.
7. Close the Ar laser shutter.
1-148
4 Adjusting the fiber polarizing orientation
1. Align the knob on the polarizer-equipped tool with

the index. Mount the polarizer-equipped tool on the
polarizing orientation adjustment tool with the knob
at the top.
Figure 5.3-63
2. Clamp the emission end of the optical fiber to the

polarizing orientation adjustment tool. Place a
light-scattering target (such as paper) before it.
Position the fiber so that it is not subjected to
excessive force, and so that both ends are laid out
straight.
Figure 5.3-64
3. Open the Ar laser shutter. Insert a tool into the

coupling and rotate while monitoring the laser light
image on the target to find the point giving the
minimum brightness.
(If the three screws on the coupling are too tight,
loosen them slightly before rotating.)
Coupling clamping screw
Figure 5.3-65
4. Place the power meter in front of the polarizer to

measure the laser power.
5. Rotate the polarizer-equipped tool by 90 degrees so

that the knob faces to the side, place the power
meter in front of the polarizer, and measure laser
power.
6. Check that the extinction ratio (ratio of bright to dark

laser power) is at least 20:1.
If not, repeat the adjustment procedure from step 1.
Figure 5.3-66
7. Tighten the three clamping screws on the coupling.
1-149
1. Attach the emitter end of the optical fiber to the

power meter tool and adjust to find the point giving
the maximum brightness, while measuring the
brightness on the power meter. To adjust the
brightness, use either the laser incidence side H
adjustment screw (horizontal) or V adjustment screw
(vertical), together with the fiber side V adjustment
screw and H adjustment screw.
As a guide to Ar laser incidence efficiency, the
Fiber side adjustment Laser incidence side brightness at the end of the coupler should be at
screw adjustment screw least 50% of the brightness in front of the coupler.
Figure 5.3-67
(Adjustment example)
(1) Turn the laser incidence side H adjustment
screw 30 to 60 degrees in one direction.
(2) Turn the fiber side H adjustment screw in the

same direction as (1) to find the point giving a
maximum brightness.
If brightness does not increase, turn the laser
incidence side adjustment screw 30 to 60
degrees in the direction opposite to (1). Turn
Figure 5.3-68 the fiber side adjustment screw in the same
direction to find the point giving a maximum
brightness.

point in the horizontal axis giving a maximum
brightness.
(4) Turn the laser incidence side V adjustment

screw 30 to 60 degrees. Turn the fiber side V
adjustment screw in the same direction to find
Figure 5.3-69 the point giving a maximum brightness.

point in the vertical axis giving a maximum
brightness.
(6) Repeated adjustments along the horizontal and

vertical axes may result in even greater
brightness.
1-150
2. Tighten the two clamp screws on the coupler, and

then tighten the rotation clamp screw.
Figure 5.3-70
3. Record the Ar laser brightness. (Note the power

meter wavelength setting.)
4. Open the other laser shutters and check that laser

light is emitted. If no light is emitted from the other
lasers, repeat the procedure of P.1-132, “Adjusting
the He-Ne laser and 405 cylindrical laser.”
1-151
5.3.6 Final Adjustment for the He-Ne Laser Light and 405 Laser Light with the
Optical Fiber
The procedure given below describes how to transmit laser light through the fiber by adjusting the dichroic
mirror adjustment unit and beam shift unit alone, without using the coupler.
1. Open the shutter only for the laser to be used. Close

the shutters on the other lasers.
2. Adjust the horizontal and vertical axis setscrews on

the dichroic mirror adjustment unit while monitoring
the brightness on the power meter to find the point
giving a maximum brightness.
To reduce tightening deviations, tighten the two

horizontal axis clamp screws to the point at which
the dichroic mirror is able to rotate before adjusting
horizontal rotation.
Horizontal axis clamp screws
Figure 5.3-71
3. Adjust the beam shift unit to find the point giving a

maximum brightness.
Adjust horizontally either by rotating the beam shift

unit by hand or by inserting an Allen key in the tool
hole. Adjust vertically by moving the vertical axis
setscrew up or down with the clamp screw loosened.
Approximately 45% should be achieved in front of

Tool hole and behind the fiber coupling for each laser.
Figure 5.3-72
For the 405 cylindrical laser, this figure is
approximately 10%.
(Transmitting the light through the AOM unit will
distort the beam shape and result in a lower
transmission ratio than without the AOM unit.)
Vertical axis clamp screw Vertical axis setscrew
Figure 5.3-73
1-152
4. Carefully tighten the beam shift unit vertical axis

clamp screw. Readjust the rotation axis on the beam
shift unit if the brightness decreases here. Then
carefully tighten the horizontal axis clamp screw.
Horizontal axis clamp screw
Figure 5.3-74
Figure 5.3-75
5. Once the point giving a maximum brightness has

been found, carefully tighten the two horizontal axis
clamp screws alternately on the dichroic mirror
adjustment unit. If the brightness decreases after
tightening, readjust the vertical axis.
6. Carefully tighten the vertical axis clamp screw.

Excessive tightening is not necessary if large
tightening deviations occur.
Figure 5.3-76
7. Record the brightness for each laser.
8. Close all the laser shutters.
Figure 5.3-77
• When the AOM unit will not be used, proceed to Section 5.3.8, “Attaching the Sheet Metal
Cover.”
• To use the AOM unit, continue to Section 5.3.7, “Adjusting the AOM Controller.”
1-153
5.3.7 Adjusting the AOM Controller (When the AOM Unit Used Only)
1 Adjusting the AOM controller bias
For the adjustment work, the “Ti Tool” of the “Ti Setup
Tool Software” is required.
Figure 5.3-78
2 Attaching the AOM controller cover
1. Attach the cover to the AOM controller.

2. Turn on the [REMOTE] switch on the rear of the AOM controller.
This completes the AOM controller adjustment.
1-154
5.3.8 Attaching the Sheet Metal Cover
1. Attach four harness bands to the laser unit mount.
Figure 5.3-79
2. Secure the cables and fibers with harness bands.
Harness bands
Figure 5.3-80
3. Attach the sheet metal cover using the six screws.
4. Align the knob with the control range indicator for the
light control knob.
Figure 5.3-81
5. Affix the label provided corresponding to the laser

wavelength used.
Figure 5.3-82
This completes the laser adjustment.
1-155
5.4 LU4A Four-laser Module A

The setup procedure for the LU4A four-laser module A is described below.
* The procedures on how to setup the previous LU4 model of the four-laser module are described in this
section. It is also possible to use this system in combination with the new LU4A four-laser module A.
5.4.1 Preparation
5.4.6 Final Adjustment for Other Laser Light with the Optical Fiber
5.4.7 Removing the AOTF Driver Remote Controller
(3) (2) (1) (3) (2) (1)
(4) (4)
LU4A LU4
Figure 5.4-1
(1) L1 (See the table below.)

Table 5.4-1
L1 L2 L3 L4
LU4A Four-laser Module A HeNe laser (green) or

638-nm laser Ar laser (single line or
405-nm laser 561-nm solid-state
(red) multiple lines) or 488-nm
440-nm laser *1 laser
LU4 Four-laser Module 647-nm laser solid-state laser
594-nm solid laser *1
*1: Mountable only to the LU4A. The filter settings must be done manually.
1-156
5.4.1 Preparation
Check the accessories (shown in Figure 5.4-2)

supplied with the LU4A four-laser module A.
• 561 laser adapter
• 561 laser adapter cover
• 561 Laser setscrew (x4)
• Black hexagonal bolt (x4)
Figure 5.4-2 • Black ring (x4)
• Harness band (x6)
• Laser wavelength label (x1)
For connection to the PC and the laser safety cover
(only for the TIRF system), use the following
connection cables supplied with the TI-LU4SU
shutter unit LU4.
• USB cable
• Cable for the laser safety cover
In addition, an A1-TII cable is required for the
connection to the interlock connector of the
microscope Ti.
2 Detaching the fixing blocks
Sheet metal cover 1. Unscrew the screws on both side plates of the
four-laser module A. (There are 12 screws to be
unscrewed. Six on the right side and six on the left
side.) And then, detach two side plates.
2. Loosen the screws on the sheet metal cover on the
front part and detach the sheet metal cover.
Side plate
Figure 5.4-3
1-157
4 locations 3. Unscrew each hexagonal bolt on the fixing block at

four locations, and then remove the four anchoring
tools.
Hexagonal bolt
Figure 5.4-4
Anchoring tool
4. Take a hexagonal bolt of step 3. Insert it into two

fixing blocks. Fix them on the basement inside the
body near the right side plate. Fix the other two
hexagonal bolts on the basement inside the body
near the left side plate.
Bolt
Figure 5.4-5
Figure 5.4-6 Right side basement
Figure 5.4-7 Left side basement
5. Slide four covers to close the holes of the hexagonal

bolts of the fixing blocks and fix the covers.
Figure 5.4-8
1-158
3 Wiring
Connect the USB cable supplied with the TI-LU4SU shutter unit between the four-laser module A and
the PC.
4 Attaching the provided black rings
4 locations 1. Remove the bolts and nuts at four locations of the

laser inlets. Be careful not to drop the bolts and nuts.
(Hold the bolts and nuts with fingers to prevent them
from falling.)
Figure 5.4-9
Figure 5.4-10
2. Affix the black rings (sponges) to the openings. The

center of the ring must be aligned with the center of
the opening.
Black ring
Figure 5.4-11
1-159
5 Removing the fiber coupling
Loosen three knurled screws on the outer side of the

optical fiber coupling device and remove the optical
fiber coupling device. Handle the coupling carefully
to prevent contamination of the space inside.
Figure 5.4-12
1-160
1 Ar laser installation
488-nm laser adapter 1. Unscrew the four hexagonal bolts on the 488-nm
laser adapter attached to the four-laser module A
body. And then, detach the 488-nm laser adapter
from the four-laser module A body.
2. Attach the laser adapter detached in step 1 onto the
Ar laser.
Precautions
Note that the screw positions of the laser adapter
for the 488-nm multiple lines Ar laser (black body)
differ from that for the 488-nm single line Ar laser
(white body).
Ar laser side (near side) • For 488-nm multiple lines Ar laser:
Three near-side holes
Screw holes for 488-nm
single line Ar laser • For 488-nm single line Ar laser:
Three far-side holes
Screw holes for 488-nm
multiple lines Ar laser
Figure 5.4-13
3. Mount the Ar laser to the L3 position on the

four-laser module A. The laser emission port must
contact the black ring to prevent scattered light of
laser from leaking. Press the laser emission port
against the black ring. The black ring becomes
flattened. Fix the laser body temporarily with four
hexagonal bolts of step 1.
Black ring
Attach while pressing against the
black ring just enough to compress it.
Figure 5.4-14
4 locations
Figure 5.4-15
1-161
2 405(440)-nm laser installation and 638-nm laser installation
1. Remove six hexagonal bolts (three bolts each) at the L2 position and L1 position of the four-laser
module A for the 405-nm (440-nm) laser and 638-nm laser.
2. Mount the 405(440)-nm laser to the L2 position of
Fix with hexagonal bolts
the four-laser module A. And then mount the 638-nm
laser to the L1 position on the laser unit. The laser
emission port must contact the black ring to prevent
scattered light of laser from leaking. Press the laser
emission port against the black ring. The black ring
becomes flattened. Fix the laser body temporarily
with four hexagonal bolts of step 1.
Attach while pressing against the

black ring just enough to compress it.
Figure 5.4-16
3. < for LU4A >

Do not connect a cable to these LD connectors. Do not connect the modulation cable. If connected,
the device does not operate correctly.
（Connectors on the four-laser module A rear panel）
Figure 5.4-17
<for LU4> (Do not use in this system.)

Connect the modulation cable of the 405-nm laser to
the "405 LD" connector. And connect the modulation
cable of the 638-nm laser to the "638 LD" laser
connector.
CAUTION:
Put on laser-protection goggles in 405LD
adjustment.
638LD connector 405LD connector (E.g.: Yamamoto Kogaku 1/100-attenuation Blue Laser
Diode YL331M)
Figure 5.4-18
1-162
3 Installing the green HeNe laser
Use the polarizer-equipped tool provided with the green HeNe laser and mount the laser so that the
polarization orientation of the laser light is vertical.
When the polarization orientation of the laser light is vertical at the incident port of the AOTF, the
polarization orientation of the laser light is horizontal at the emission port of the AOTF.
Protrusion Mark 1. Align the protrusion of the polarizer-equipped tool to
the mark.
Figure 5.4-19
2. Mount the polarizer-equipped tool to the place. See

the figure at right. The curved side of the
polarizer-equipped tool faces the front of the
four-laser module A.
Laser unit front
Figure 5.4-20
1-163
3. Loosen two hexagonal bolts at the slots of the green

HeNe laser adapters. And then, insert the green
Label Slot x 2
HeNe laser into the sleeve of the laser adapters.
4. The laser emission port must contact the black ring
to prevent scattered light of laser from leaking. Press
the laser emission port against the black ring. The
ring becomes flattened. Confirm that the label on the
HeNe laser faces upward when installed.
Press against the black ring
Figure 5.4-21
5. Put a target such as a piece of paper in the optical

path away from the polarizer-equipped tool.
6. Manually open the L4 laser shutter to emit the laser
light. At this time, insert an Allen wrench into the
shutter to keep the shutter open.
Figure 5.4-22
7. Rotate the green HeNe laser body to adjust the laser

light on the target. The rotation of the laser body
must be stopped at the position where the laser light
is the darkest.
8. Tighten two hexagonal bolts at the slots of the green
HeNe laser adapters to fix the green HeNe laser.
Figure 5.4-23
1-164
4 561-nm solid-state laser installation
Normally, the green HeNe laser adapters are attached to the four-laser module A at the product is
shipped from the factory. To use the 561-nm solid-state laser, loosen four hexagonal bolts of the green
HeNe laser adapters and remove the green HeNe laser adapters along with the hexagonal bolts.
1. Attach the 561-nm laser adapter (provided with the
561-nm laser Black ring four-laser module A) onto the 561-nm laser. And
then, attach a black ring to the laser emission port.
561-nm laser adapter

Figure 5.4-24
2. Mount the 561-nm laser body onto the L4 position.

Fix the laser body with four bolts provided with the
four-laser module A.
3. Detach the screw near the emission port of the
561-nm laser adapter temporarily.
Figure 5.4-25
4. Attach the 561-nm laser adapter cover provided with

the laser unit and fix it with the screw detached in
step 3.
Laser adapter cover

Figure 5.4-26
This is the end of the laser installation.
1-165
5 405-nm (Coherent) solid-state laser installation
1. Attach a black ring to the L2 laser inlet of the LU4A

body.
Figure 5.4-27
2. Install the 405C N-STORM laser adapter

(MXA22115) to L2 of the LU4A.
Figure 5.4-28
3. Install the laser to the supplied laser adapter part

(small) with the supplied four screws so that the laser
is pressed against the black ring. Open the shutter
incorporated in the end of the laser body before
installing the laser. (The left knob in the figure)
Figure 5.4-29
4. Install the laser adapter part (small) installed in step

3 to the laser adapter (table with ND filter attached)
with two screws.
5. Set the ND filter installed in the laser adapter to the
OUT state (removed upward) before adjusting the
laser.
* This figure shows the IN state (pushed
downward).
Figure 5.4-30
1-166
6 561-nm (Coherent) solid-state laser installation
This product is shipped from the factory with the G-HeNe laser adapter installed to the laser module as
standard equipment. To use the 561-nm solid-state laser, loosen the four hexagonal bolts of the
G-HeNe laser adapter and remove the G-HeNe laser adapter with the hexagonal bolts.
body. (Photo is omitted.)
2. Install the 561C N-STORM laser adapter
(MXA22117) to L4 of the LU4A.
Figure 5.4-31
3. Install the laser to the 561C N-STORM laser adapter

with the four screws supplied with the laser adapter.
4. Set the ND filter installed in the laser adapter to the
OUT state (removed upward) before adjusting the
laser.
* This figure shows the OUT state (removed
upward).
Figure 5.4-32
1-167
7 647-nm (Crystalaser) solid-state laser installation

body.
Figure 5.4-33
2. Install the 647-nm laser adapter to L1 of the LU4A.

(Tilt the laser itself 45 degrees to match the laser
output polarization.)
Figure 5.4-34
3. Install the laser to the laser adapter with the screws

supplied with the laser adapter so that the laser is
pressed against the black ring. (Open the shutter
incorporated in the end of the laser body before
installing the laser.)
Figure 5.4-35
Figure 5.4-36
1-168
Oscillation method:
(1) Confirm that the knob on the front of the control box
has been fully turned counterclockwise and that the
key switch is turned off.
(2) Turn on the switch on the rear of the control box.
(3) Turn on the key switch on the front of the control
box.
(4) Wait for about one minute.
(5) Slowly and fully turn the knob on the front of the
Figure 5.4-37 control box clockwise. (At this time, the front LED
indicator shows about 100.)
Terminating method:
(1) Slowly and fully turn the knob on the front of the control box counterclockwise.
(2) Turn off the key switch on the front of the control box.
(3) Turn off the switch on the rear of the control box.
1-169
8 Laser warm-up and AOTF warm-up
1. Remove transparent tape at the inlet and outlet of

Transparent tape
the AOTF unit.
Figure 5.4-38
2. Warm up the lasers and the AOTF

(1) Turn off the [REMOTE] switch on the back of the
laser unit.
(2) Turn on the power switch on the back of the laser
unit and the lasers. Allow the units to warm up for
20 minutes or longer.
• When the [REMOTE] switch is turned off, the
four-laser module A can be turned on or off
independently.
[REMOTE] switch
• When the [REMOTE] switch is turned on, the
Figure 5.4-39 power control of the four-laser module A is linked
with the controller.
* After the adjustment of the four-laser module A,
turn on the [REMOTE] switch.
Precautions when warming up the laser unit

• Leave the lasers turned on for approximately 20 minutes before adjusting. Making adjustments
immediately after turning on the lasers may result in shifts from adjusted levels.
1-170
1 Checking the initial beam shift unit position
Tool hole 1. The tool hole and the horizontal clamp screw on the
side of the beam shift part must be aligned vertically.
2. The cylindrical glass must not tilt significantly.

* Check all beam shift parts in steps 1 and 2. (By
default, the beam shift parts are arranged as
described above.)
Horizontal axis clamp screw Cylindrical glass
Figure 5.4-40
2 Connect the AOTF driver remote controller.
AOTF driver USB connector Connect the cable of the AOTF driver remote
controller to the USB connector of the AOTF driver at
the lower part of the laser unit.
Figure 5.4-41
AOTF driver remote controller

Connect the AOTF remote controller cable to the USB port of the AOTF driver. When connected,
the remote controller screen displays “external mode.”
To change the screen on the controller to internal mode, press any numeric key on the controller.
Then, press the numeric key assigned to the required laser wavelength (see the table below for
the key assignment list). The wavelength number will be displayed on the screen and the
corresponding laser beam starts irradiating. To cancel the selection, press the key again. The
frequency and the power level can be set for individual laser wavelength.
1-171
Table 5.4-2 Laser wavelengths available with the AOTF driver remote controller
On the screen Wavelength Laser
L1 457 nm
L2 477 nm
Ar laser
L3 488 nm
L4 514 nm
L5 543 nm Green HeNe laser
L6 561 nm 561-nm solid-state laser

*1
L7 405/440 nm 405/440LD
638 nm 638LD
L8 *1
Setting is necessary 647-nm laser
*1: For LU4A only
3 Adjusting the Ar laser position
In the LU4A four-laser module A, the coupled laser

light does not pass through the AOTF before the
laser coupling mirror part. The AOTF is located
beyond the laser coupling mirror part where the four
laser lights are coupled.
1. Select the line three (L3) with the AOTF remote
controller to use the 488-nm Ar laser.
Figure 5.4-42
2. Unscrew the two hexagonal bolts at the laser

coupling mirror part and detach the laser coupling
mirror part.
Precautions
At the detachment of the laser coupling mirror
part, the collimation pin may come with the laser
coupling mirror part. Be careful to prevent the
pin from getting lost.
Hexagonal bolts
Figure 5.4-43
1-172
3. If the collimation pin comes with the laser coupling

mirror part, take the collimation pin from the laser
coupling mirror part and restore the pin into the hole
again. Attach the centering tool to the collimation pin.
Rotate the centering tool so that the laser light enters
the hole of the centering tool at a right angle.
Centering tool
Figure 5.4-44

path away from the centering tool.
Figure 5.4-45
5. Open the shutter of the Ar laser ("OPEN" position).

And then, manually open the L3 laser shutter.
Ar laser shutter
Figure 5.4-46
1-173
6. The laser light direction can be adjusted horizontally

by moving the laser body with hands.
To complete the adjustment, follow the procedures
described below under each module name.
Figure 5.4-47
<for LU4A> (Do not use in this system.)

Hole L
Hole S (1) Attach the centering tool to the laser module at
position A shown in the figure below. Adjust the laser
light direction horizontally by moving the laser body
or vertically by moving the Ar laser mirror adjustment
part so that the laser light enters the hole L (see
Figure 5.4-48).
Centering tool
A Figure 5.4-48
(2) Attach another centering tool to the laser module at
position B shown in the figure below. Adjust the
Hole L beam shift part with respect to the centering tool at
Hole S
position A and move the laser body with respect to
the centering tool at position B so that the Ar laser
light roughly enters the hole L of each centering tool.
(3) Tighten the clamp screws of both the Ar laser body
fixing part and the Ar laser mirror adjustment part to
secure the respective parts.
Centering tool
A B
Figure 5.4-49
0th-order light <for LU4> (Do not use in this system.)

Aim the 1st-order light of the laser at the hole of the
centering tool attached in step 3 by moving the Ar
laser body. The laser light must pass through the
hole.
1st-order light
Figure 5.4-50
1-174
Tighten temporarily 7. Fully loosen the clamp screw at the right of the Ar
laser mirror adjustment part viewed from the laser
coupling mirror part to the laser body. And loosen the
clamp screw to the halfway point at the left of the Ar
laser mirror adjustment part.
Tighten securely
Figure 5.4-51
Ar mirror adjustment part 8. Insert a screw driver into the adjustment hole on the
Ar laser mirror adjustment part. And pry it to adjust
the laser light position in the vertical direction. Aim
the laser light at the hole of the centering tool
attached in step 3 by moving the screwdriver.
Adjustment hole
Figure 5.4-52
9. Attach another centering tool onto the collimation pin

to the left of the AOTF unit viewed from the front of
the four-laser module A. Rotate the centering tool so
that the laser light enters the hole of the centering
tool at a right angle.
(The centering tool attached in step 3 must be
untouched. Two centering tools are used on the
laser unit to adjust the laser position.)
Centering tool attached in step 3
Centering tool attached in step 9
Figure 5.4-53
Centering tool
Figure 5.4-54
1-175
Vertical clamp screw 10. Loosen the clamp screw for the horizontal direction
(nearer to the axis A)
Vertical setscrew
of the L3 beam shift part.
(farther from the axis A) 11. The laser light direction can be adjusted horizontally
by rotating the whole L3 beam shift part by hands.
Aim the laser light at the hole of the centering tool
attached in step 9 by rotating the L3 beam shift part.
12. Loosen the clamp screw for the vertical direction of
Rotate by hand the L3 beam shift part.
13. The laser light direction can be adjusted vertically by
rotating the setscrew for the vertical direction of the
L3 beam shift part. Aim the laser light at the hole of
the centering tool of step 9 by rotating the setscrew
for the vertical direction.
Horizontal clamp screw Axis A 14. Repeat steps 6, 8, 11, and 13. The laser light must
Figure 5.4-55
pass through the holes of the centering tools.
Ar mirror adjustment part 15. After the completion of the adjustment, tighten two
clamp screws of the Ar laser mirror adjustment part
to fix the Ar laser mirror adjustment part. And then,
fix the Ar laser body with four hexagonal bolts.
Clamp screw (2 locations)

Figure 5.4-56
Hexagonal bolt
(4 locations)
Figure 5.4-57
1-176
0th-order light Light-shielding plate

16. Check that the 0th-order light from the AOTF unit is
shielded by the shield plate. And then, close the
shutter of the optical path for the Ar laser light.
If the 0th-order light is not shielded, the position of
the shield plate must be adjusted. Loosen the clamp
screw of the shield plate, and then adjust the position
so that the shield plate stops the 0th-order light.
1st-order light
Figure 5.4-58
17. Remove the centering tool attached in step 9.
1-177
4 Adjusting other lasers
1. To adjust the green HeNe laser or the 561-nm

solid-state laser, select the laser wavelength with the
numeric key on the AOTF remote controller.
* To adjust the green HeNe laser,
select L5 (543 nm).
* To adjust the 561-nm solid-state laser,
Select L6 (561 nm).
(At the initial condition settings, the AOTF driver is
Figure 5.4-59 not adjusted well enough. Therefore the transmitted
light from the AOTF may be dark.)
2. Loosen the clamp screw of the spring of the L4
dichroic mirror adjustment part. And then, detach the
spring.
Figure 5.4-60
3. Loosen the clamp screw of the L4 dichroic mirror

adjustment part body. And then, detach the dichroic
mirror adjustment part body.
Precautions
At the detachment of the dichroic mirror
adjustment part, the collimation pin may come with
the dichroic mirror adjustment part body. Be
careful to prevent the pin from getting lost.
Figure 5.4-61
To complete the adjustment, follow the procedures described below under each module name.
< for LU4A >

4. For the green HeNe or 561-nm solid-state laser,
attach the centering tool to the collimation pin after
detaching the dichroic mirror adjustment part. Rotate
the centering tool so that the laser light enters the
hole of the centering tool at a right angle. Adjust the
beam shift part so that the laser light enters the hole
L.
Figure 5.4-62
1-178
Position B 5. Reattach the dichroic mirror adjustment part and

Centering tool attach the centering tool to position B. Adjust the
Hole L
dichroic mirror adjustment part in both horizontal and
vertical directions so that the laser light enters the
hole L.
Figure 5.4-63
6. As for the 405 (440) LD and 638LD, do the same as

in the case of L4. Namely, attach the centering tool
to the collimation pin after detaching the dichroic
mirror adjustment part. Adjust the beam shift part so
that the laser light enters the hole L.
Centering tool
Hole L
Figure 5.4-64
Position B Centering tool Hole S 7. Reattach the dichroic mirror adjustment part and
attach the centering tool to position B. Adjust the
Hole L dichroic mirror adjustment part in both horizontal and
Hole S vertical directions so that the laser light enters the
hole S (located at a distance of 1 mm left to the hole
L with respect to the AOTF unit viewed from the front
of the four-laser module A), not the hole L.
Figure 5.4-65
Laser coupling mirror part 8. After adjustment, reattach the laser coupling mirror
part.
Figure 5.4-66
9. Select Line 3 (L3) on the AOTF remote controller

and change the Ar laser wavelength to 488 nm.
1-179
Position C Laser coupling mirror part 10. Attach the centering tool to position C and adjust the
Centering tool Hole L
laser coupling mirror part in both horizontal and
vertical directions so that the laser light enters the
hole L.
Clamp screws
Figure 5.4-67
11. Tighten the clamp screws on the laser coupling

mirror part to secure it.
< for LU4 > (Do not use in this system.)

In this section, the green HeNe laser and the 561-nm solid-state laser are described as examples.
4. Attach the centering tool to the collimation pin of the

L4 dichroic mirror adjustment part. Rotate the
centering tool so that the laser light enters the hole of
the centering tool at a right angle.
Centering tool
Figure 5.4-68

path away from the centering tool.
6. Manually open the L4 laser shutter.
Figure 5.4-69
1-180
Vertical clamp screw 7. Loosen the clamp screw for the horizontal direction
(nearer to the axis A)
Vertical setscrew of the L4 beam shift part.
(farther from the axis A) 8. Aim the laser light at the hole of the centering tool
attached in step 4 by rotating the L4 beam shift part.
9. Loosen the clamp screw for the vertical direction of
the L4 beam shift part.
10. Aim the laser light at the hole of the centering tool
Rotate by hand
attached in step 4 by rotating the setscrew for the
vertical direction of the L4 beam shift part.
11. Close the L4 laser shutter. And then remove the
centering tool attached in step 4.
Horizontal clamp screw Axis A
Figure 5.4-70
12. Restore the dichroic mirror adjustment part to its

original position. (See step 3.) And then fix it with a
clamp screw temporarily.
Figure 5.4-71
13. Attach the spring of the dichroic mirror adjustment

part.
Figure 5.4-72
attached in step 3 in "3. Adjusting the Ar laser
position" by rotating the setscrew for the horizontal
direction adjustment of the L4 dichroic mirror
adjustment part.
Horizontal-direction setscrew Centering tool
Figure 5.4-73
1-181
16. Fully loosen the clamp screw that fixes the setscrew
for the vertical direction adjustment of the L4 dichroic
mirror adjustment part.
Figure 5.4-74
position" by rotating the setscrew for the vertical
direction adjustment of the L4 dichroic mirror
adjustment part.
Vertical-direction setscrew Centering tool
Figure 5.4-75
18. Close the L4 laser shutter.
19. To adjust the 405-nm laser or the 638-nm laser,

select the laser wavelength on the AOTF remote
controller. And then, take the same steps for the
green HeNe laser or the 561-nm solid-state laser.
Rotate the centering tool 90 degrees that was
position. The laser light from the 405-nm laser or the
638-nm laser must enter the centering tool at a right
angle.
The laser light must pass through the hole of the
centering tool.
Remove the centering tools.
Centering tool
Figure 5.4-76
1-182
1 Adjusting the AOTF driver
Refer to the data sheet provided with the laser unit. Adjust and register the frequency and power
settings of the AOTF driver for the four wavelengths of the Ar laser, the wavelength of each of the
green HeNe laser and the 561-nm solid-state laser (and 405-nm (440-nm) laser and 638-nm laser for
LU4A).
In this section, an example case is explained. (The case for the 457-nm wavelength of the Ar laser is
explained.)
1. Select the line one [L1] with the AOTF driver remote
controller.
3. Press the [1] key on the AOTF remote controller and

the display changes as shown in Figure 5.4-78.
Set the power to 18 dB on the AOTF remote
controller.
Subject the sensor of the power meter to the laser
light from the AOTF. Refer to the AOTF data sheet
provided with the laser unit and adjust the frequency
by pressing arrow keys (< and >) so that the laser
Figure 5.4-77 power value of the power meter becomes the
maximum. Keep pressing the arrow key to
consecutively or incrementally increase or decrease
the figure.
Note:
When performing frequency control, keep in
mind that if a horizontal arrow is kept pressed,
the figure will increase/decrease very quickly
after the increase or decrease balance exceeds 2
MHz.
Figure 5.4-78
The frequency value on the data sheet is only a
guide. The optimum frequency value varies
depending on the incidence angle and wavelength of
the laser light emitted to the AOTF.
When some steps of the frequency value cause the
same maximum power, the lowest frequency value is
used.
To select another wavelength number, press the key
assigned to it.
Figure 5.4-79
1-183
In case of the LU4A, remove the fiber coupling and

Attach the power attach the power meter to the far end of the laser
meter with a tape. module body with a tape. It enables you to perform
the AOTF remote controller adjustment while
measuring the laser power.
Figure 5.4-80
Precautions
When some steps of the frequency value cause the same maximum power, the lowest
frequency value is used.
The 1st-order light transmittance of the 405-nm laser, 440-nm laser and 638-nm laser is
lower than that of other lasers; it is as low as approximately 65%.
The transmittance of the 488-nm Ar laser passed through the AOTF is approximately 50%
of the whole Ar laser light.
The transmittance of the 543- or 561-nm laser is approximately 90%.
In case the frequency adjustment has failed, a vertical stripe pattern may periodically
appear in a captured image, at the wavelengths of 543 nm and 561 nm in particular. In that
case, carefully readjust the frequency.
4. Subject the sensor of the power meter to the laser

light. Change the [POWER] value by pressing the
arrow key (∧ or ∨) button so that the laser power
value of the power meter becomes maximum.
Calculate the 99% value of the maximum. And then
adjust the [POWER] value so that the laser power
value of the power meter becomes the 99% value of
the maximum.
Precautions
If the [POWER] value is too large, the linearity of
the brightness control will be affected. Be sure to
adjust the [POWER] value so that the laser power
value becomes the 99% value of the maximum.
Figure 5.4-81
1-184
5. Press the [STR] key on the AOTF driver remote

controller after adjustments.
Settings are stored into the AOTF driver.
Press [ESC] key to again display the wavelength
number for the laser beam to be emitted. Another
press on the key turns the display to “external
mode.”
Precautions
Be sure to press the [STR] key after each
adjustment to store the settings. The settings will
not take effect unless the [STR] key is pressed.
Figure 5.4-82
6. Close the L3 laser shutter.
This is the end of the adjustment for the 457-nm laser.
7. Repeat steps 1 to 4 for other lasers; 477-nm Ar laser, 488-nm Ar laser, 514-nm Ar laser, green
HeNe laser, and 561-nm solid-state laser (and 405-nm (440-nm) laser and 638-nm laser for
LU4A).
For details about wavelengths and laser types for each [LINE], refer to "2. Connect the AOTF
driver remote controller" in Section 5.4.3, “Laser Rough Adjustment 1.”
1-185
2 Adjusting the laser coupling mirror part
Adjust the optical path of the Ar laser (488 nm). The

optical path of the Ar laser is used as a reference. Optical
paths of other lasers are aligned with it.
1. Restore the laser coupling mirror part to its original
position. (Refer to Step 2 in "3. Adjusting the Ar laser
position" in Section 5.4.3, “Laser Rough Adjustment
1.”)
Tighten temporarily
Figure 5.4-83
Laser shutter at the incident side of the mirror part 2. Attach the centering tool into the optical path at the
inlet of the optical fiber. Rotate the centering tool so
that the laser light enters the hole of the centering
tool at a right angle.
3. Manually open the L3 laser shutter. (The laser
shutter at the incident side of the mirror part must be
opened manually too.)
Centering tool Mirror reflector
Figure 5.4-84
4. Select the line three (L3) with the AOTF remote

controller to use the 488-nm Ar laser.
5. Insert a screwdriver into the adjustment hole for the
horizontal direction adjustment on the laser coupling
mirror part. And pry it to adjust the laser light position
in the horizontal direction.
Horizontal adjustment hole
Figure 5.4-85
1-186
Vertical adjustment hole 6. Slightly loosen the two clamp screws for the vertical
direction adjustment on the laser coupling mirror
part.
7. Insert a screwdriver into the adjustment hole for the
vertical direction adjustment on the laser coupling
mirror part. And pry it to adjust the laser light position
in the vertical direction.
Clamp screw
Figure 5.4-86
Hexagonal bolts 8. Tighten two hexagonal bolts on the laser coupling

mirror part and two clamp screws of step 6 after
adjustments.
Figure 5.4-87
9. Close the L3 laser shutter and the laser shutter at

the incident side of the mirror part.
1-187
3 Aligning each laser beam to the Ar laser beam
1. Put a target such as a piece of paper at 50 cm or farther away from the outlet of the laser of the
optical fiber coupling device.
2. Emit the Ar laser and the green HeNe laser or
561-nm solid-state laser together by using the AOTF
remote controller.
• To align the green HeNe laser to the Ar laser:
Press the [3] and [5] keys in this order while the
screen of the AOTF driver remote controller
displays “internal mode.” The 488-nm Ar laser and
Figure 5.4-88 the G-HeNe laser are emitted together.
• To align the 561-nm solid-state laser to the Ar
laser:
Press the [3] and [6] keys in this order while the
screen of the AOTF driver remote controller
displays “internal mode.” The 488-nm Ar laser and
the 561-nm solid-state laser are emitted together.
3. Manually open the L3 laser shutter and L4 laser
shutter.
4. Observe the two spots on the target. One spot is the
light of the Ar laser. The other spot is the light of the
green HeNe laser or the 561-nm solid-state laser.
Align two spots. Adjust the L4 dichroic mirror adjustment part so that
the two spots converge. (Do not touch any part of the
Ar laser optical path.) For details about the
adjustment, refer to Steps 15 to Step 17 <for LU4> in
Figure 5.4-89 "4. Adjusting other lasers" in Section 5.4.3, “Laser
Rough Adjustment 1.”)
5. Observe the two spots on the mirror part. Two spots
here must converge to the same point, too. Adjust
the L4 beam shift part of the laser to be aligned. (Do
not touch any part of the Ar laser optical path.) For
details about the adjustment, refer to Steps 7 to Step
10 <for LU4> in "4. Adjusting other lasers" in Section
5.4.3, “Laser Rough Adjustment 1.”)
Align two spots.
Figure 5.4-90
6. Repeat Step 4 and Step 5. Laser spots on the target and the mirror part must be aligned.
7. Close the L3 laser shutter and L4 laser shutter.
8. Repeat Step 1 to Step 7 for the 405-nm laser and the 605-nm laser.
1-188
Knurled screws 1. Loosen three knurled screws at the optical fiber

coupling device.
2. Insert the coupler centering tool into the optical fiber
coupling device so that its pinhole side faces the
laser incident side.
Coupler centering tool
Figure 5.4-91
3. Put a target such as a piece of paper away from the

laser outlet. Manually open the L3 laser shutter and
the L4 laser shutter.
4. Rotate the adjustment screws "H" and "V" on the
laser incident side to maximize the laser intensity.
Figure 5.4-92
Adjustment screw on the H laser incidence side
Adjustment screw on the V laser incidence side
Figure 5.4-93
5. Pull out the coupler centering tool once. And then,

insert the coupler centering tool into the optical fiber
coupling device so that its pinhole side faces the
laser outlet side.
1-189
Adjustment screw on the H fiber side 6. Rotate the adjustment screws "H" and "V" at the
optical fiber side to maximize the laser intensity.
Adjustment screw on the V fiber side
Figure 5.4-94
7. Repeat Step 5 and Step 6 to maximize the laser

intensity.

2. Attach the optical fiber coupling device. The tool hole
must face upward and the key groove must be on
the right viewed from the front side of the fiber
coupling device. Tighten three screws to fix it.
Figure 5.4-95
Tool hole
Key groove
Figure 5.4-96
1-190
WARNING
Never look directly at the fiber tip. Always monitor laser emissions by aiming the tip down
onto a sheet of paper.
1. Carefully align the end of the optical fiber (the end

without the tag) with the key groove in the coupling
and insert as far as it will go. Carefully tighten the
optical fiber connector. Gradually tighten it. And stop
when the laser light is emitted from the tip of the
optical fiber.
Figure 5.4-97
2. If no laser light is emitted from the optical fiber even

though the operation of Step 1 is performed, do the
followings: Loosen the optical fiber connector about
10-degree angle. Pull the optical fiber carefully. And
check and see the laser light emission. (The laser
light will be defocused with this operation. A laser
light is emitted more easily if defocused.) If it is not
effective, repeat loosening the connector and pulling
the optical fiber a couple of times.
Figure 5.4-98
Adjustment screw on the H fiber side

3. When even a small amount of laser light is observed,
adjust two screws, "H" and "V," at the optical fiber
side of the optical fiber coupling device to maximize
the laser intensity.
4. Tighten the optical fiber connector gradually, and
stop the rotation just before the laser light
disappears.
Figure 5.4-99
5. Again, adjust the screws, "H" and "V," at the optical fiber side of the optical fiber coupling device
to maximize the laser intensity.
6. Repeat Step 4 and Step 5 to maximize the laser light intensity where the optical fiber connector is
fully tighten.
* If no light is emitted even after repeating these steps, repeat the procedure from step 1 in
Section 5.4.5, “Final Adjustment for the Ar Laser Light with the Optical Fiber."
1-191
Measure the intensity of the Ar laser light with the power meter. Adjust the beam shift part and the
screws, "H" and "V," on the optical fiber side of the optical fiber coupling device to get the maximum
intensity.
As a guideline for the efficiency of the Ar laser through the optical fiber, the intensity at the tip of the
optical fiber is at least 50% of the intensity before entering the optical fiber coupling device.
1. Attach the tip of the optical fiber onto the power
meter tool.
Figure 5.4-100
Vertical setscrew
(farther from the axis A)
2. Rotate the whole L3 beam shift part by hands and
adjust the angle to get the maximum intensity of the
Ar laser light.
3. Rotate the setscrew for the vertical adjustment on
the L3 beam shift part and adjust to get the
maximum intensity of the Ar laser light.
Rotate by hand
Axis A
Figure 5.4-101
Adjustment screw on the H fiber side 4. Rotate the adjustment screws "H" and "V" on the
optical fiber side of the optical fiber coupling device
to maximize the laser intensity.
Figure 5.4-102
5. Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 to maximize the Ar laser

intensity.
1-192
5 Fixing the beam shift part and the optical fiber coupling device
Vertical clamp screw 1. Tighten the clamp screws for the horizontal direction
(nearer to the axis A) and the vertical direction to fix the L3 beam shift part.
Rotate by hand
Figure 5.4-103
Knurled screws 2. Tighten the center knurled screw of the optical fiber
coupling device. And then, gradually tighten two
other knurled screws to fix the optical fiber coupling
device.
Figure 5.4-104
1-193
5.4.6 Final Adjustment for Other Laser Light with the Optical Fiber
Other laser lights than the Ar laser have been adjusted by performing up to step 3 "Aligning each laser beam
to the Ar laser beam" in Section 5.4.4, “Laser Rough Adjustment 2." For the most part, other laser light
passes through the optical fiber at the completion of Section 5.4.5, “Final Adjustment for the Ar Laser Light
with the Optical Fiber." Therefore, the adjustments for other laser lights are performed with the beam shift
part and the dichroic mirror adjustment part.
1 Adjustment to reach the maximum laser light transmissions through the optical fiber
1. Attach the tip of the optical fiber onto the power
meter tool.
Vertical setscrew 3. Rotate the whole L4 beam shift part by hands and
(farther from the axis A)
adjust the angle to get the maximum intensity of the
laser light.
4. Rotate the setscrew for the vertical adjustment on
the L4 beam shift part and adjust to get the
Rotate by hand maximum intensity of the laser light.
Axis A
Figure 5.4-105
5. Rotate the setscrew for the horizontal adjustment on

the L4 dichroic mirror adjustment part and adjust the
angle to reach the maximum intensity of the laser
light.
Horizontal setscrew
Figure 5.4-106
1-194
Vertical setscrew 6. Rotate the setscrew for the adjustment in the vertical
direction on the L4 dichroic mirror adjustment part
and adjust the angle to reach the maximum intensity
of the laser light.
Figure 5.4-107
7. Repeat Step 3 to Step 6 to maximize the laser intensity.

8. Repeat Step 1 to Step 7 for the 405-nm laser and the 605-nm laser.
2 Fixing the beam shift part and the optical fiber coupling device
Vertical clamp screw 1. Tighten the clamp screws for the horizontal direction
(nearer to the axis A) and the vertical direction to fix the L1 beam shift part,
L2 beam shift part, and L4 beam shift part.
Rotate by hand
Figure 5.4-108
2. Tighten the clamp screws for the horizontal direction

and the vertical direction to fix the L1 dichroic mirror
adjustment part, L2 dichroic mirror adjustment part,
and L4 dichroic mirror adjustment part.
3. Record the power of each laser.
Clamp screw
Figure 5.4-109
1-195
5.4.7 Removing the AOTF Driver Remote Controller
1. When all the adjustments have been made, press

the [ESC] key of the AOTF driver remote controller
once or twice to display “external mode” on the
screen.
Figure 5.4-110
2. Remove the AOTF driver remote controller. Laser

control by PC is now available.
Precautions:
• Laser control by PC is not available when the AOTF driver remote controller screen does not
display “external mode.” Make sure that the screen displays “external mode” before starting the
laser control.
This is the end of the laser adjustments.
1-196
1. Check the inside of the laser unit.
2. Fix cables and optical fibers with cable bands

provided with the laser unit.
Figure 5.4-111
3. Install the sheet metal covers.
Figure 5.4-112
4. Attach each side panel and fix it with six screws

each. (The Nikon marking is indicated on the back
part.)
Nikon marking
Figure 5.4-113
5. Affix provided stickers to indicate laser wavelengths.
Figure 5.4-114
This is the end of the setup procedure of the four-laser module A.
1-197
5.5 Setting Up the LU-LR Four-laser PS Rack
CAUTION
1) The LU-LR four-laser PS rack is heavy. The laser rack weighs approximately 30 kg with
laser supplies unmounted. Do not attempt to lift or carry the four-laser PS rack by
yourself.
2) Unplug the two power cables of the LU-LR four-laser PS rack before mounting power
supplies into the four-laser PS rack.
3) Be sure to use the LU-LR four-laser PS rack power cables that meet the ratings.
4) If any trouble occurs in the LU-LR four-laser PS rack, unplug the two power cables of
the four-laser PS rack.
5.5.1 System Description
Overview
This unit is called the LU-LR four-laser PS rack. This rack houses power supplies for lasers in the laser unit,
and turns on multiple lasers or emits all lasers at a time. The rack can be mounted on top of the laser unit.
The following power sources manufactured by Melles Griot can be mounted in the rack:
Table 5.5-1 Mountable power sources

Violet Laser head: 56 ICS425
405 to 410 nm/38 mW
Power supply: 56 IMA 023
Laser head: 56 ICS426

440 to 445 nm/15 mW
Blue Laser head: IMA101040ALS

457 to 514 nm/40 mW
Power supply: 300 series
Laser head: IMA101065ALS

457 to 514 nm/65 mW
Laser head: 85BCD010, 020, 030 (CDRH supported)

488 ± 0.5 nm/10, 20, 30 mW
Power supply: 85BCD series
Green Laser head: 05LGP 193

543.5 nm/1 mW
Power supply: 05LPL951-065/100V, 05LPL915-065/115V/230V
Yellow Laser head: 85YCA010, 020, 025

561 nm/10, 20, 25 mW
Power supply: 85YCA series
Red Laser head: 56 ICS 264

638 nm/10 mW
1-198
Components (accessories included)

1. LU-LR four-laser PS rack
Figure 5.5-1
2. Clamp for laser power supplies
x2 x1 x4
Figure 5.5-2 Figure 5.5-3 Figure 5.5-4
[1] For Ar laser [2] For HeNe laser [3] For laser diodes and DPSS
laser
Option
Figure 5.5-5
[4] For previous laser diode

(till March 2007)
3. Interlock jumper connector
Figure 5.5-6
1-199
4. Keys for the EMISSION switch
Figure 5.5-7
5. Ferrite core
[1] For Ar laser cable [2] For Ar laser remote

controller cable
1-200
5.5.2 Mounting Laser Power Supply
Mounting positions, clamps, and cables vary with the type of laser power supply. Select the clamp positions,
clamp types, and cables suitable for each laser supply.
Power supplies mounted
Table 5.5-2 Mounting Position
Wavelength Product Location Clamp Cable Procedure
Violet Laser head: 56RCS/S2780

[2] [3] [2] 3.1
Power supply: 56 IMA023
Laser head: 56RCS/S2781

[2] [3] [2] 3.1
Power supply: 56 IMA021
Blue Laser head: IMA101040ALS

[1] [1] [3], [5] 3.2
Laser head: IMA101065ALS

[1] [1] [3], [5] 3.2
Laser head: 85BCD010, 020, 030

(CDRH supported) [4], [5] [3] [6], [7], [9] 3.3
Green Laser head: 05LGP 193

Power supply: 05LPL951-065/100V, [3] [2] [4] 3.4
05LPL915-065/115V/230V
Yellow Laser head: 85YCA010, 020, 025

[4], [5] [3] [6], [7], [8] 3.3
Power supply: 85YCA series
Red Laser head: 56 ICS 264

[2] [3] [1] 3.1
1-201
Position of laser power supplies

1. Positions of laser power supplies
(1) Ar, HeNe, Laser diode x 2
[1] Ar laser
Rear Front
Control box of LU-LR

[2] Laser diodes four-laser PS rack [3] HeNe laser
Figure 5.5-10
(2) Ar, DPSS, Laser diode x 2

[1] Ar laser [5] DPSS laser (power supply)
Rear Front

[2] Laser diodes four-laser PS rack [4] DPSS laser (controller)
Figure 5.5-11
1-202
(3) DPSS, HeNe, Laser diode x 2

[4] DPSS laser (controller) [5] DPSS laser (power supply)
Rear Front

four-laser PS rack
[2] Laser diodes [3] HeNe laser
Figure 5.5-12
(4) DPSS x 2, Laser diode x 2

[4] DPSS laser (controller) [5] DPSS laser (power supply)
Rear Front

[2] Laser diodes four-laser PS rack [4] DPSS laser [5] DPSS laser (power supply)
(controller)
Figure 5.5-13
1-203
2. Positions of cables
[4] HeNe laser power cable

(HeNe 543 nm) [3] Ar laser power cable
(IMA Ar Laser)
[1] Laser diode power cable [2] Laser diode power cable
(56ICS-638nm) (56ICS-405nm, 56ICS-440nm)
Rear Front
[5] RC cable for the Ar laser [7] RC cables for the DPSS laser [9] DPSS laser power cable
(IMA REMOTE CONT) (85BCD/YCA RS232C) (85BCD-488nm)
[6] IT cables for the DPSS laser [8] DPSS laser power cable
(85BCD/YCA INTERLOCK) (85YCA-561nm)
Figure 5.5-14
1-204
Mounting procedure
1) Remove the side panel, the top panel, and the port panel on the rear side of
the LU-LR four-laser PS rack.
↓
2) Mount required laser power supplies into the four-laser PS rack. For details,
refer to Chapter 3.
2-1 Set the conditions of all laser heads, the power supplies, and the
switches on the controllers to get them ready for laser emission.
↓
2-2 Secure all the laser power supplies at the specified positions with
the provided clamps which are temporarily fixed in place.
↓
2-3 Draw the cables connecting between the laser power supplies and
the laser heads from the cable port on the rear side.
If any of the cables are the same series, make sure that they can be
identified.
↓
2-4 Connect the specified cables such as power cables or interfaces to

the laser power supplies and bundle the cables.
3) Bundle disused cables and secure it. (Refer to the figure 5.5-17 on the next
page.)
↓
4) Attach the removed panels to their original positions.

↓
5) Connect the cables drew from the four-laser PS rack to each laser.
Attach the provided ferrite core to the Ar laser cable and to the Ar laser
remote controller cable. (Refer to the figure 5.5-16 on the next page.)
↓
6) Connect the provided interlock jumper connector to the INTERLOCK

connector on the rear. (Refer to the figure 5.5-15 on next page.)
↓
7) Connect the provided two power cables to the AC inlet of the four-laser PS
rack. Use the power cables that meet the ratings indicated below.
AC inlet (15A type): 125V, 15A (for 100V/120V model),
250V, 10A (for 230V model)
AC inlet (5A type): 125V, 7A (for 100V/120V model),
250V, 6A (for 230V model)
1-205
INTERLOCK
connector
Port for cables
AC inlet (15A type)

Ferrite core for Ar laser
AC inlet (5A type)
Figure 5.5-15
Ar laser remote controller
Ferrite core for the

Ar laser remote controller
Figure 5.5-16
Bundle disused cables and secure it
Figure 5.5-17
1-206
5.5.3 Details on Mounting Laser Supply
Mounting laser diodes (56ICS series)

1. Turn on the key switch and the power switches of the laser diode heads located outside
the four-laser PS rack.
2. Secure the laser diode power supplies in the positions [2] with the provided clamps [3].
3. Connect the power cable [1] (56ICS-638nm) or [2] (56ICS-405nm, 56ICS-440nm) to each
of the laser diode power supplies.
4. Pull the cables routed from the laser diode power supplies out of the rack through the
cable port on the rear side. If any of the cables are the same series, mark them for
identification.
Laser diode power supplies
Power cables
（56ICS-405nm）
（56ICS-440nm） To the laser diode head
（56ICS-638nm）
Clamps
Figure 5.5-18
1-207
Mounting Ar laser (IMA series)

1. Turn on the key switch and the power switch of the Ar laser power supply. Additionally,
move the POWER ADJUST control of the Ar laser power supply fully clockwise.
2. Secure the Ar laser power supply in the positions [1] with the provided clamps [1].
3. Connect the power cable [3] (IMA Ar Laser) and the RC cable for the Ar laser [5] (IMA
REMOTE CONT) to the Ar laser power supply.
4. Connect the cable (to be connected to the Ar laser head) to the Ar laser power supply
through the cable port on the rear side.
Ar laser power supply
Power cable
(IMA Ar Laser)
Clamps
To the Ar laser head
RC cable for the Ar laser

（IMA REMOTE CONT）
Figure 5.5-19
Key switch
Power switch
[POWER ADJUST] volume
Figure 5.5-20
1-208
5. Connect the cable (to be connected to the Ar laser remote controller) to the LU-LR
four-laser PS rack control box located in the rack through the cable port on the rear side.
LU-LR four-laser PS rack
Remote controller cable

(To the Ar laser head)
Figure 5.5-21
1-209
Mounting DPSS laser (85BCD/85YCA series)

1. Turn on the key switch of the DPSS laser controller.
2. Secure the DPSS laser controller in the position [4] with screws. (Fix the DPSS laser
controller directly to the bottom plate without clamps.)
3. Secure the DPSS laser power supply in the position [5] with the provided clamps [3].
4. Connect the power cable [8] (85YCA-561nm) or [9] (85BCD-488nm) to the DPSS laser
power supply.
5. Connect the DPSS laser power cable to the DPSS laser controller.
6. Connect the interlock cable [6] (85BCD/YCA INTERLOCK) to the "INTERLOCK" port of
the DPSS laser controller. (The specifications of the two interlock cables are same with
each other.)
7. Connect the [INTERLOCK] port of the DPSS laser controller and the control box of the
LU-LR four-laser PS rack with the provided RS232C cable [7] (85BCD/YCA RS232C).
The cable [7] can be connected to either of the two connectors whose specifications are
same with each other.
8. Connect the cable (to be connected to the DPSS laser head) to the DPSS laser controller
through the cable port on the rear side.
To the DPSS laser head

DPSS laser
power supply
DPSS IT cable
Clamp (IT cable for the DPSS laser)
(85BCY/YCA INTERLOCK)
Power cable
(85YCA-561nm)
(85BCD-488nm) DPSS laser controller
RC cable for the DPSS laser

(85BCD/YCA RS232C)
Figure 5.5-22
Key switch
RC cable for the

DPSS laser
DPSS laser (85BCD/YCA RS232C)
power cable
Figure 5.5-23
1-210
RC cable for the

DPSS laser
(85BCD/YCA RS232C) LU-LR four-laser PS rack
Figure 5.5-24
1-211
Mounting HeNe laser (25LGP series)

1. Turn on the key switch of the HeNe laser power supply.
2. Secure the HeNe laser power supply in the position [3] with the provided clamp [2].
3. Connect the power cable [4] (HeNe-543nm) to the HeNe laser power supply.
4. Connect the cable (to be connected to the HeNe laser head) to the HeNe laser power
supply through the cable port on the rear side.
Power cable
(HeNe-543nm)
Clamp
HeNe laser
power supply To the HeNe
laser head
Figure 5.5-25
Key switch
Figure 5.5-26
CAUTION
• Mount the HeNe laser power supplies that meet the local power requirements. Misuse of the
power supplies result in damage.
1-212
6 Connection between the Laser Unit and the Microscope
6.1 Setting and Connecting the TI-LUSU Shutter Unit

(8) Laser unit connector (6) Safety cover signal connector
(9) Serial IF connector (4) Interlock cable connectors
(3) AC adapter connector
(7) Safety cover close

RS-232C LASER UNIT INPUT lamp
12V
SAFETY
CLOSE
(5) Eyepiece optical
BINO path closed lamp
CLOSE
POWER (1) Power switch
TI-LUSU
(10) Laser shutter (2) Power lamp
switch / indicators
Figure 6.1-1
TIRF illuminator unit or motorized TIRF illuminator unit

1. Connect each of the connectors as shown in the figure.
2. Connect the cables for the AC adapter, the laser safety cover, the laser unit and the interlock to the
TI-LUSU shutter unit.
3. The TI-LUSU shutter unit can open the laser unit’s motorized shutter when both the laser safety cover
and eyepiece optical path are closed. The motorized shutter closes when its cable is not connected or
the like.
4. Note that you can use each of the lasers by pressing the shutter switch.
Photo activation illuminator unit

1. Connect each of the connectors as shown in the figure.
2. Connect the cables for the AC adapter, the laser unit and the interlock to the TI-LUSU shutter unit.
3. The TI-LUSU shutter unit can open the laser unit’s motorized shutter when the eyepiece shutter is
closed. The motorized shutter closes when its cable is not connected or the like.
4. Note that you can use each of the lasers by pressing the shutter switch.
1-213
Chapter 6 Connection between the Laser Unit and the Microscope
6.1.1 Control System Selection
The settings of the TI-LUSU shutter unit must be set up in accordance with the system configuration, the
case for the TI-TIRF or the TI-TIRF-E or the case for the TI-PAU. Check your system configuration and set
up the following if necessary.
DIP switch S6 settings

The DIP switch (S6) in the TI-LUSU shutter unit enables the safety cover open/close detection.
For the TI-TIRF/TI-TIRF-E system, the switch must be enabled to detect the safety cover open/close
condition for laser safety (factory default settings). For the TI-PAU system, no laser safety cover is used for
the system. Therefore, the switch must be disabled.
For details about the DIP switch settings, refer to Section 6.1.4, “DIP Switch Settings.”
CAUTION
The DIP switch (S6) is set up for the TI-TIRF/TI-TIRF-E system in the factory default settings. If the
switch settings are accidentally changed to the TI-PAU settings in the TIRF system, the status
signal of the safety cover open/close condition cannot be detected, the safety interlock will be
disabled. If the laser safety cover is removed during the laser light emission in such a case, the
motorized shutters in the laser unit will not close. To secure safety from laser light, be sure to set up
the switch correctly.
Affixing a label
When the DIP switch settings are complete, attach the TI-TIRF special label or the TI-PAU special label to
the given position in the Section 1.3.9, “TI-LUSU Shutter Unit” in Chapter 1, “System Configurations and Part
Names.”
6.1.2 Control Mode of the Shutter Unit
DIP switch S4 settings

In the factory default settings, the TI-LUSU shutter unit is set up to the mutually exclusive control mode, that
is, two or three laser shutters do not open at a time. To control two or three laser shutters at a time, the DIP
switch S4 on the circuit board of the shutter unit must be changed to the shutter independent control mode.
For details about the DIP switch settings, refer to Section 6.1.4, “DIP Switch Settings.”
The DIP switch settings for the mutually exclusive control mode and the shutter independent control mode
effect both control methods, the laser shutter switch operation and the communications command operation.
When the shutter independent control mode is selected, additional communications commands are available.
For details about the communications commands, refer to Section 6.1.5, “Communications Commands.”
1-214
6.1.3 Setting and Connecting the TI-LU4SU Shutter Unit LU4
Option switch Laser unit connector
Indicator lamp
TI-LU4SU
LASER
EMISSION
POWER
Power lamp
Laser shutter switch
Figure 6.1-2
Settings
Settings are not required.
Connecting the TI-LU4SU unit

1. Connect the cable of the laser unit to the TI-LU4SU shutter unit.
Hang the nylon clamp supplied with the TI-LU4SU shutter unit from the loop of the cable for the laser
unit, then secure it with the spacer in between the screw holes.
Select the screw hole appropriate for installation on each side, then remove the cap from the (of all four)
screw hole to secure them.
2. For using the unit in combination with the TI-PAU unit, connect the pin jack supplied with the TI-LU4SU
to the interlock cable connector (TIRF) of the four-laser module A.
1-215
Cable of the
Cap Nylon clamp laser unit
TI-LU4SU
LASER
EMISSION
Connecting to the LU4A POWER
TI-LU4SU
Cap Spacer
Fixing bolts Nylon clamp
Cable of the laser unit
Figure 6.1-3
1-216
6.1.4 DIP Switch Settings
(1) DIP switch S6 functions and settings in the factory default conditions
Table 6.1-1
Function Description Factory default
Safety cover switch enabled: TIRF

Safety cover switch disabled: PAU
Safety cover switch • The function is disabled only when the shutter unit is used with the Safety cover switch
enable/disable TI-PAU system. enabled (TIRF)
When the function is disabled (PAU), the shutters on the laser unit
can be opened/closed even when the safety cover is not closed.
(2) DIP switch S4 functions and settings in the factory default conditions
Table 6.1-2
Bit Function Description Factory default
Mutually exclusive control mode: (B1, B2) = (OFF, OFF) = EXCLUSIVE

B1 Shutter independent control mode: (B1, B2) = (ON, ON) = NON-EX Mutually exclusive
Mutually
control mode
exclusive/shutter • When the shutter independent control mode is selected, an
independent operation to open/close a laser shutter does not effect other For laser safety, the
control mode shutters. mutually exclusive
B2 Shutter independent control commands are enabled in control mode is selected.
communications controls.
Two-laser unit/three-laser unit auto detection: B3 = OFF = AUTO

Two-laser unit: B3 = ON = 2-LASER
B3 Laser unit type OFF (AUTO)
• When the B3 is ON, the two-laser unit settings is selected. The
laser switch 3 and the laser switch 3 commands are disabled.
B4 Vacant Not used OFF
1-217
(3) DIP Switch Locations
Detach the four screws on the bottom of the shutter unit to open the bottom plate with the circuit board.
The DIP switches are mounted on the lower left part of the circuit board viewed from the operation switch
side.
OFF ON
1
EXCLUSIVE NON-EX
2
AUTO 3 2-LASER
4
TIRF PAU
S4 S6
DIP switches S4 and S6
Figure 6.1-4
1-218
6.1.5 Communications Commands
(1) Standard commands
The following are factory default commands and can be used in the standard condition.
The shutter unit controls laser shutters so that only one shutter opens at a time in the standard condition.
1 c command: Operation, control, and data setting command

Table 6.1-3
o: Normal
c command response Description
n: Error response
The command opens the specified shutter. The command closes the
specified shutter.
If an open time period has been specified, the shutter will close when
the specified period elapses.
oTSO Note that no shutter will open if the optical path for the binocular route
cTSO(1)
nTSO(6) is open or the safety cover is open.
(1): [1-3] Shutter number
(6) :Error code
* The safety cover open/close condition is detected only for the
TIRF/motorized TIRF illuminator system.
oTSC
cTSC The command closes all shutters.
nTSC(6)
The command sets up the shutter open time.
(3): [0000-1000] Time setting
oTTS
cTTS(2):(3) * [0000] is used to open the shutter continuously. The value is
nTTS(6)
specified in steps of 0.1 seconds. (100.0 seconds maximum)
Example: 0001 for 0.1 seconds
(6): Error code
The command enables/disables the laser open/close switch on the
oTSW control panel.
cTSW(4)
nTSW(6) (4): [1] Enabled, [0] Disabled
(6): Error code
1-219
2 r command: Data request command

Table 6.1-4
a: Normal
r command response Description
n: Error response
The command reads the shutter condition.
(1): [0] means all shutters are closed. [1] to [3] means the shutter of the
aTSR(1) number is open.
rTSR
nTSR(6) (6): Error code
* The rTSR command is disabled in the shutter independent control
mode.
The command reads the shutter open time setting.
aTTS(2) (1): [1-3] Shutter number
rTTS(1)
nTTS(6) (2): [0000-1000] Time setting
(6): Error code
The command reads the open/close conditions of the eyepiece tube
optical path and the safety cover.
(3): [1] means that either of the binocular route or the safety cover is
aTES(3)
rTES open. [0] means both are closed.
nTES(6) (6): Error code
* The safety cover open/close condition is detected only for the
TIRF/motorized TIRF illuminator system.
The command reads the setting for the laser open/close switch on the
aTSW(4) control panel.
rTSW
nTSW(6) (4): [1] Enabled, [0] Disabled
(6): Error code
The command reads the program version.
aVER(5)
rVER (5): V*.** (Five characters. “*” is a numeral. Example: V1.00)
nVER(6)
(6): Error code
The command reads the program name.
aPNM(5)
rPNM (5): T-LUSU
nPNM(6)
(6): Error code
1-220
(2) Shutter independent control commands
The following commands are enabled when the TI-LUSU shutter unit is set to the shutter independent control
mode.
Two or more shutters can be opened at a time.
1 c command: Operation, control, and data setting command

Table 6.1-5
o: Normal
c command response Description
n: Error response
The command opens/closes the shutter 1st, 2nd, and 3rd at a time
independently.
(2): [0]: 1st shutter closed, 2nd shutter closed, 3rd shutter closed
[1]: 1st shutter open, 2nd shutter closed, 3rd shutter closed
[2]: 1st shutter closed, 2nd shutter open, 3rd shutter closed
oTSD
cTSD(2) [3]: 1st shutter open, 2nd shutter open, 3rd shutter closed
nTSD(6)
[4]: 1st shutter closed, 2nd shutter closed, 3rd shutter open
[5]: 1st shutter open, 2nd shutter closed, 3rd shutter open
[6]: 1st shutter closed, 2nd shutter open, 3rd shutter open
[7]: 1st shutter open, 2nd shutter open, 3rd shutter open
(6): Error code
The command opens the specified shutter.
oTIO
cTIO(3) (3): [1-3] Shutter number
nTIO(6)
(6): Error code
The command closes the specified shutter.
(This command is enabled only when the shutter independent control
oTIC
cTIC(4) mode.)
nTIC(6)
(6): Error code
2 r command: Data request command

Table 6.1-6
a: Normal
r command response Description
n: Error response
The command reads the condition of the shutter independent control
aTEX(1) mode.
rTEX
nTEX(6) (1): [1] Enabled, [0] Disabled (standard condition)
(6): Error code
The command reads the shutter condition.
(2): [0]: 1st shutter closed, 2nd shutter closed, 3rd shutter closed
[1]: 1st shutter open, 2nd shutter closed, 3rd shutter closed
[2]: 1st shutter closed, 2nd shutter open, 3rd shutter closed
aTSD(2) [3]: 1st shutter open, 2nd shutter open, 3rd shutter closed
rTSD
nTSD (6) [4]: 1st shutter closed, 2nd shutter closed, 3rd shutter open
[5]: 1st shutter open, 2nd shutter closed, 3rd shutter open
[6]: 1st shutter closed, 2nd shutter open, 3rd shutter open
[7]: 1st shutter open, 2nd shutter open, 3rd shutter open
(6): Error code
1-221
6.2 Attaching the Optical Fiber to the Light Source
Using straight fiber (part used in PAU illuminator unit)

Attach the straight fiber adapter when using a straight fiber, which has a straight tip, rather than C1
single-mode fiber (note that you cannot connect using this method with the photo activation illuminator unit).
1. Remove the FC connector. Below that, remove all the screws for the round plate attached to the stage.
2. In place of the round plate, use the same screws to secure the straight fiber adapter into place. See
Figure 6.2-1 for the up-down positioning.
3. Re-attach the FC connector.
Up
Straight fiber adapter
Straight fiber
adapter
Straight fiber
Figure 6.2-1
1-222
Using C1 single mode fiber

Draw the optical fiber through the round ring metal cover and attach the optical fiber to the FC connector.
When inserting the cable, be sure to align it with the FC connector's notch, and then fully screw in the
knurled section. After attaching the fiber, tighten the clamp screw to secure the round ring metal cover.
Round ring metal cover
Fiber
IN
IN
IN

KLASSE 3B,

ND16
ND8
ND2
FC connector
Figure 6.2-2
(The figure shows TI-TIRF.)
1-223
6.3 Replacement of Optical Path Switch Mirror
To replace the optical path switch mirrors, which switch between the laser light and epi-fl illumination light,
perform the following.
WARNING
Cap 1. Remove the retaining screw for the cap of the mirror
replacement opening.
Figure 6.3-1
2. Remove the cap of the mirror replacement opening

(threaded cap).
Figure 6.3-2
3. Pull out the mirror switch lever, and then pull out the
mirror unit while holding the tab of the mirror unit
(magnetic lock).
Note: When using the motorized TIRF illuminator unit,
you must turn off the power with the mirror already
retracted.
Figure 6.3-3
1-224
Holder plate locking screws 4. Remove the two holder plate locking screws. And then,
remove the holder plate and flat spring to replace the
mirrors.
Mirror size: 36 x 25.7 x 1
Holder plate
5. Assembly is the reverse of disassembly.
Flat spring Place the reflection surface of the mirror downward into
the cutout of the mirror frame.
Mirror There is a positioning hole on the mirror unit. Securely

(Place the
reflection
attach the mirror unit to the illumination attachment to fit
surface the pin on the main body.
downward.)
Figure 6.3-4
CAUTION
For using the laser beam for passing through the mirror, if the mirror is not set in a collimated angle,
interference fringes may appear in the PA-GFP illumination. Carefully set the mirror in a collimated
angle except when using a total reflection mirror.
(Standard collimated angle for the half mirror is 5".)
1-225
6.4 Installing the N-STORM Kit
Installation method
1. Install the laser specified for the N-STORM kit to the LU4A through the dedicated laser adapter.
2. Install the Ti-E fixing plates and the DSC support columns of the N-STORM kit.
3. Install the 3D-STORM port, STORM slider, lambda plate slider, and N-STORM filter cube.
The metal N-STORM filter cube is used for N-STORM microscopy. This filter cube is installed at the
same location as the filter cube for normal fluorescent microscopy.
Figure 6.4-1
4. Remove the STORM slider from the optical path and adjust the illumination light position through the
normal N-STORM microscopy.
5. Return the STORM slider to the optical path and check the N-STORM state again.
6. Operate the 405-nm, 457-nm, and 561-nm laser adapters and insert an ND filter into each laser. Then
adjust the laser with the laser intensity set to 5% by NIS-Elements so that the output level at the 100 x
1.40 or 100 x 1.49 object output end becomes approximately 1 μW.
7. After the laser adapter is installed, adjust the 647-nm laser so that the laser output becomes maximum
at the fiber output end.
The installation of the N-STORM kit has been completed.
1-226
Operating the N-STORM optical system

When the optical system for N-STORM microscopy is installed, the ND filter of the laser adapter, the STORM
slider, the lambda plate slider, and the cylindrical lens of the 3D-STORM port must be inserted or removed
according to the microscopy method as shown in the following table.
Table 6.4-1
Laser unit Inverted microscope body
Microscopy
method Laser adapter ND 3D-STORM port
STORM slider Lambda plate slider
filter cylindrical lens
Confocal
OUT Not used Not used Not used
microscopy
Epifluorescent
OUT Not used Not used OUT
microscopy
TIRF microscopy OUT OUT OUT OUT
2D STORM IN IN IN OUT
3D STORM IN IN IN IN
IN OUT
(The ND filter is placed within the optical path.) (The ND filter is placed out of the optical path.)
Figure 6.4-2 IN state and OUT state of the laser adapter ND filter
1-227
7 Confirmation and Check Sheet
7.1 Checking Procedure
The system is a FDA Class 3B and EN Class 3B laser product. The laser devices are FDA Class 3B and EN
Class 3b components. The final confirmation for the laser safety standards should be done after setting up.
Put a laser safety label on the prescribed place after confirming.
(1) Laser intensity power
The recommended lasers can be put on the laser unit (see Table 5.1-1). Follow the process below and
confirm that calculated values satisfy the standard values to check laser intensities. If a calculated laser
intensity exceeds the standard value, contact the department in charge and do not ship the laser
product.
(1) Maximize each laser intensity.
(2) Remove all of movable ND filters from the optical path and adjust the argon laser to its maximum
power.
(2) Labels
Confirm the following labels put on the prescribed place (step 10 of “4.2.1 Assembling Each Part and
Attaching Them to the Microscope” in Chapter 4 of Part 1).
• Laser radiation label.
• Laser safety label.
(3) Check sheet
Fill out the necessary items on the check sheet and send it to the department in charge.
1-228
Chapter 7 Confirmation and Check Sheet
7.2 Check Sheet
7.2 Check Sheet
The person setting up the system should check the details listed in the sheet below and enter the results.
The completed sheet should be sent to the supervisor.
Table 7.2-1
Serial number
TI-TIRF TIRF Illuminator Unit/TI-TIRF-E

Motorized TIRF Illuminator Unit/TI-PAU
Photo Activation Illuminator Unit
Shutter unit (model name: )
Laser unit (model name: )
1. Setup and user
Table 7.2-2
Setup date
Setup location
Person performing setup
User Name:
Address:
Contact:
2. Product configuration
Table 7.2-3
No. Product
1 Microscope Main unit Ti-E Ti-E/B Ti-U Ti-U/B
2 Shutter unit T-LUSU TI-LU4SU
3 Laser Laser Unit C-LU2 C-LU3 C-LU3EX LU4A
4 Laser name L1 : (ND: )
L2 : (ND: )
L3 : (ND: )
L4 : (ND: )
5 Laser PS rack Y N
6 Optical fiber Model name C1 single mode fiber/other :
1-229
7.2 Check Sheet
3. Safety checks
Table 7.2-4
No. Unit Check items Check
1 Is there a gap between the unit and laser head? Y N
2 Laser and Is the protective cover securely attached? Y N
3 laser unit Does any laser light leak from gaps in the protective cover? Y N
4 Is the sheet metal cover attached? Y N
5 Is the optical fiber securely fixed? Y N
6 Are all the retaining screws on the accessories (Field diaphragm unit,
eyepiece tube, fluorescent lamp, nosepiece, condenser, diascopic Y N
illumination) securely tightened?
7 Are objectives or caps mounted in all the openings in the nosepiece? Y N
8 Are cameras or caps attached to all ports? Y N
9 Does the motorized shutter on the laser unit close when the laser safety
Microscope cover is detached in TI-TIRF TIRF Illuminator Unit/TI-TIRF-E Motorized Y N
TIRF Illuminator Unit?
10 Does the motorized shutter on the laser unit close when the optical path in
Y N
the microscope main unit is switched to the eyepiece?
11 Is the dia-illuminator 100W attached? Y N
12 Is the protection plate attached between the epi-fl filter turret and the
Y N
nosepiece or between the epi-fl filter turret and the PFS nosepiece?
13 Is the lock attached after the filter cube port cover is attached? Y N
14 Are labels affixed at the specified locations? Y N
4. Power check
Table 7.2-5
No. Check items Measured Value
1 L1: %
2 Optical fiber efficiency: L2: %

Laser intensity ratio between incident light and outgoing light of the
3 single mode fiber L3: %
4 L4: %
5 L1: mW
6 Laser intensity at aperture: L2: mW

Maximum intensity of the laser emitted from the opening of the
7 nosepiece for each laser unit L3: mW
8 L4: mW
Power meter Manufacturer:

Model name:
Serial number:
Calibration date:
1-230
8 Specifications and Performance
8.1 Overall Configuration
8.1.1 TIRF Illuminator Unit / Motorized TIRF Illuminator Unit― Configuration

for Normal Microscopy (Except N-STORM)
Table 8.1-1
Unit Device Model name Remarks
Ti-E
Ti-E/B Use the TI-DH Dia Pillar Illuminator
Ti
Ti-U 100W.
Ti-U/B
Apo TIRF 60×H/1.49
Apo TIRF 100×H/1.49
Objective for TIRF Plan Apo TIRF 60×H/1.45 Select the appropriate objective for
microscopy Plan Apo TIRF 100×H/1.45 observations.
Plan Apo VC 60×H/1.4
Plan Apo VC 100×H/1.4
TI-LUSU The unit can be connected to a PC.
Shutter unit
Microscope and TI-LU4SU For the four-laser module A.
accessories
AC adapter EA1050E-120 For TI-LUSU shutter unit
TI-FLC
The TI-FLC-E/HQ comes with three
Epi-fl filter turret TI-FLC-E
special high-precision filter cubes.
TI-FLC-E/HQ
Fiber optic light source
Episcopic light Make sure to read the instruction
source Lamphouse + power manuals for the products.
supply
Stage ring 26
Model 32 is made of glass.
(concentric ring) 32
required.
TI-TIRF Two illumination modes are available,
TIRF TIRF (100%) and TIRF (60%)-Epi-fl
TI-TIRF-E (40%).
A straight fiber can be used when used
Optical fiber C1 single mode fiber
with the straight fiber adapter.
TIRF/ The adapter is attached to the
motorized TIRF Straight fiber adapter TIRF2 S illuminator to use an optical fiber with a
illuminator unit straight tip.
Use the stage up lens when a stage up
kit is installed and a TIRF/motorized
Stage up lens TI-TIRF Stage up lens TIRF illuminator unit is attached to the
lower tier. The TI-BSUK70 70 mm
stage up kit is also required.
PC Commercially available
TIRF image Monitor Commercially available
observation devices
TV camera (video An adapter is required to connect to
Commercially available
camera) the microscope port.
1-231
Chapter 8 Specifications and Performance

Three-laser unit C-LU3
Laser unit See Table 8.1-3 for mountable lasers.
Three-laser unit EX C-LU3EX
Filter slider cover
retaining plate
Ti laser safety kit
Safety label
Protection plate for
nosepiece
8.1.2 Motorized TIRF Illuminator Unit ― Configuration for N-STORM
Table 8.1-2
Ti-E Use the TI-DH Dia Pillar Illuminator

Ti
Ti-E/B 100W.
Objective for TIRF Apo TIRF 100 × H/1.49 Select the appropriate objective for
microscopy Plan Apo VC 100 × H/1.4 observations.
Shutter unit TI-LU4SU For the four-laser module A

Microscope and
accessories AC adapter EA1050E-120
TI-FLC-E
Epi fl-filter turret Use the N-STORM filter cube.
TI-FLC-E/HQ
Epi illumination lamp

and power supply
manuals for the products.
device
TIRF TI-TIRF-E
TIRF illuminator
Allows the cylindrical lens to be
inserted or removed. For microscopy
3D-STORM port other than 3D-STORM microscopy,
remove the cylindrical lens from the
optical path.
DSC support columns
Ti-E fixing plates
This slider can be inserted or removed.

N-STORM kit N-STORM kit parts For microscopy other than N-STORM
STORM slider microscopy, perform microscopy with
the slider lifted (with the lens removed
from the optical path).
This slider can be inserted or removed.
For microscopy other than N-STORM
microscopy, perform microscopy with
Lambda plate slider
the slider extracted toward you (with
the filter removed from the optical
path).
1-232
PC
(specified item)
TIRF image
Monitor Commercially available
observation devices
TV camera Commercially available An adapter is required to connect to the
(video camera) (specified item) microscope port.
See Section 8.1.4, “Mountable lasers”
Laser unit Four-laser module A LU4A
for mountable lasers.
Laser rack Four-laser PS rack LU-LR For the four-laser module A
1-233
8.1.3 Photo Activation Illuminator Unit
Table 8.1-3
Ti-E
Ti-E/B Use the TI-DH Dia Pillar Illuminator
Ti
Ti-U 100W.
Ti-U/B
Use objectives appropriate for
Objective
specimens.
TI-LUSU The unit can be connected to a PC.
Shutter unit
TI-LU4SU
AD-1260B
EA1050E-120
Microscope and TI-FLC
accessories Epi-fl filter turret TI-FLC-E
TI-FLC-E/HQ
Epi illumination lamp

and power supply
manuals for the products.
device
Stage ring 26
required.
Illumination for PA-GFP or Epi
Photo Activation
Photo Activation TI-PAU An optical path selector mirror is
Illuminator Unit
Illuminator Unit required.
PA-GFP image Monitor Commercially available
observation devices
TV camera (video An adapter is required to connect to the
camera) microscope port.
Two-laser unit C-LU2 See Section 8.1.4 for mountable lasers.
Three-laser unit C-LU3 See Section 8.1.4 for mountable lasers.
Laser unit See Section 8.1.4 for mountable lasers.

Three-laser unit EX C-LU3EX Included accessory
• Ar wavelength selector (C1-EX)
Filter slider cover
retaining plate
Ti laser safety kit
Safety label
Protection plate for
nosepiece
1-234
8.1.4 Mountable lasers
For the beam divergence and the maximum power, see the manual for each laser device.
Table 8.1-4 Normal Microscopy (Except N-STORM)
Mountable unit and
Type Device Laser specifications
position
1
Manufacturer: Melles Griot C-LU2 (L1)*
1
Head: 56 RCS series (56RCS/S2780) C-LU3 (L1)*
400 to 410 nm (36 mW)
Power supply: 56 IMA series (56 C-LU3EX (L1)*1
IMA021) LU4A (L2)
1
1
Head: 56 RCS series (56RCS/S2781) C-LU3 (L1)*
440 to 445 nm (20 mW)
Diode laser Power supply: 56 IMA series (56 C-LU3EX (L1)*1
(violet) IMA021) LU4A (L2)
Manufacturer: Coherent
1
Head: CUBE series (CUBE405) 405±5 nm (50, 100 mW) LU4A (L2)*
Power supply: CUBE series
1
Head: CUBE series (CUBE445) 445±5 nm (40 mW) LU4A (L2)*
Manufacturer: Melles Griot C-LU2 (L1)
Head: IMA101 series C-LU3 (L2)
457 to 514 nm (40, 65 mW)
IMA 101040 ALS, IMA 101065 ALS C-LU3EX (L2)
Power supply: 300 series LU4A (L3)
C-LU2 (L1)
C-LU3 (L2)
Head: 163 series (163-C02) 457 to 514 nm (40 mW)
C-LU3EX (L2)
Power supply: 263C series
Air-cooled LU4A (L3)
argon laser C-LU2 (L1)
C-LU3 (L2)
Head: 163 series (163-C12) 488 nm (25 mW)
C-LU3EX (L2)
LU4A (L3)
C-LU2 (L1)
Manufacturer: Spectra-Physics
C-LU3 (L2)
Head: 161C-030 488 nm (10 mW)
C-LU3EX (L2)
Power supply: 263-C04
LU4A (L3)
1
Head: 85BCD series (85BCD010, C-LU3 (L2)*1
488±0.5 nm (10, 20, 30 mW)
85BCD020､85BCD030) C-LU3EX (L2)*1
1
Power supply: 85BCD series LU4A (L3)*
1
C-LU2 (L1)*
Manufacturer: Coherent 1
Solid-state laser 488±2 nm (10, 20, 25, 30, 50, C-LU3 (L2)*
Head: Sapphire 488 LP series
(Blue) 75 mW) C-LU3EX (L2)*1
Power supply: CDRH-compliant model 1
LU4A (L3)*
Head: Sapphire 488HP series 1
488±2 nm (100, 200 mW) LU4A (L3)*
(Heatsink supplied)
Power supply: CDRH-compliant model
1
Solid state laser 1
Head: 58GCB020 532 nm (20 mW) C-LU3 (L3)*
(green)
Power supply: 56IMA017 C-LU3EX (L3)*1
1-235
Mountable unit and

position
Manufacturer: Melles Griot C-LU2 (L2)
HeNe laser Head: 05LGP193 C-LU3 (L3)
543.5 nm (1 mW)
(green) Power supply: 05LPL951-065: for 100V C-LU3EX (L3)
05LPL915-065: for 115/230V LU4A (L4)
1
Solid-state laser Head: 85YCA series (85YCA010, C-LU3 (L3)*1
561 nm (10, 20, 25 mW)
(yellow) 85YCA020, 85YCA025) C-LU3EX (L3)*1
Power supply: 85YCA series (supplied) LU4A (L4)

Head: 1677P C-LU2 (L2)
HeNe laser
Power supply: 1207-3/100V 594 nm (2 mW) C-LU3 (L1)
(yellow)
1207-1/115V C-LU3EX (L1)
1207-2/230V
Head: 1125P C-LU2 (L2)
2
Power supply: 1202-3/100V 633 nm (5 mW) C-LU3 (L1, L3)*
2
HeNe laser 1202-1/115V C-LU3EX (L1, L3)*
(red) 1202-2/230V
Manufacturer: Melles Griot C-LU2 (L2)*1
1
Head: 56 ICS 272 635 nm (3 mW) C-LU3 (L1)*
1
Power supply: 56 IMA 015/018/019 C-LU3EX(L1)*
1
Head: 56 ICS series (56ICS/S2669) C-LU3 (L1)*1
638 nm (10 mW) 1
Power supply: 56 IMA series C-LU3EX (L1)*
Diode laser (56IMA022) LU4A (L1)
(red)
Head: CUBE series (CUBE640) 640+2/-5 nm (40 mW) LU4A (L1)*1

*2: When the mounting position is set to L3, the transmittance becomes 20% to 30%.
1-236
Table 8.1-5 N-STORM

Mountable unit and
position
Diode laser 1
Head: CUBE series (CUBE405) 405±5 nm (100 mW) LU4A (L2)*
(violet)
Air-cooled Head: IMA101 series 1
457 to 514 nm (65 mW) LU4A (L3)*
argon laser IMA 101065 ALS
Solid-state laser Head: Sapphire 561 LP 1
561 nm (150 mW) LU4A (L4)*
(yellow) Power supply: Sapphire series
(supplied)
Head: CUBE series (CUBE640) 640+2/-5 nm (100 mW) LU4A (L1)*1
Diode laser Power supply: CUBE series
(red) Manufacturer: Crystalaser
Head: DL647-100 647±1 nm (90 mW) LU4A (L1)*1
Power supply: CL-2005 series
1-237
8.1.5 TI-LUSU Shutter Unit
Table 8.1-6
Model name TI-LUSU
Input ratings 12 VDC, 1A
8.1.6 AC Adapter for the TI-LUSU Shutter Unit
Table 8.1-7
Model name AD-1260B EA1050E-120
Manufacturer Medi-Power Electronics Inc. (Taiwan) EDAC POWER Electronics Co., Ltd.
Input ratings 100-240 VAC, 1.2 A, 50/60 Hz 100-240 VAC, 1.8 A, 50/60 Hz
Input voltage fluctuation ±10%
Output voltage ratings 12 VDC ±5%
Output current ratings 5 Amax 3.5Amax
Remarks UL listed, GS approved, CE satisfied, and PSE approved product
8.1.7 Power Cord for the AC Adapter of the TI-LUSU Shutter Unit
Be sure to use one of the following power cords:

Table 8.1-8
UL listed detachable power cord set, 3 conductor grounding
When used in 100-120 V
(3 conductor grounding Type SVT, No.18 AWG, 3 m long maximum,
region, outside Japan
rated at 125 VAC minimum)
Detachable power cord set approved according to EU/EN standard,
When used in 220-240 V 3 conductor grounding
region (3 conductor grounding Type H05VV-F, 3 m long maximum,
PSE approved detachable power cord set, 3 conductor grounding
When used inside Japan (3 conductor grounding Type VCTF 3x0.75mm2, 3 m long maximum,
1-238
8.2 Environmental Conditions
8.2.1 Normal Microscopy (Except N-STORM)
Operating conditions
Table 8.2-1
Temperature 5 to 35°C
Relative humidity 60% RH maximum with no condensation
Altitude 2,000 m maximum
Pollution degree Degree 2
Installation category Category II
Class I
Electric shock protection class
Indoor use only
Storage conditions
Table 8.2-2
Temperature -20 to 60°C
8.2.2 N-STORM
Table 8.2-3
Temperature 20 to 25°C (±0.5°C)
Electric shock protection class Class I

Indoor use only
Storage conditions
Table 8.2-4
Temperature –20 to 60°C
1-239
8.3 Safety Standards Compliance
8.3.1 Normal Microscopy (Except N-STORM)
Table 8.3-1
• This product complies with IEC60825-1 Class 3B requirements.
Laser safety
• This product complies with FDA Class 3B requirements.
• This product meets EU Low Voltage Directive requirements.

• This product meets EU EMC Directive requirements. (EN61326)
CE marking
• This product complies with FCC15B Class A requirements.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Other categories Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at his own expense.
• This product complies with Canadian EMI standards. (ICES-003 Class A)
Cet appreil numérique de classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.
• This product complies with Australian EMI standards.
(AS/NZS CISPR11)
1-240
8.3.2 N-STORM
Table 8.3-2
Laser safety • This product complies with IEC60825-1 Class 3B requirements.
CE marking • This product meets EU Low Voltage Directive requirements.

Other categories • This product complies with FCC15B Class A requirements.

Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference
at his own expense.
• This product complies with Canadian EMC standards. (ICES-003 Class A)
Canada.
• This product complies with Australian EMC standards. (AS/NZS2064 Group 1
Class B)
1-241
Part 2
For Setting Up TI-TIRF-PAU and LU4-B5
Series
Setup Manual
Contents
1. System Configurations and Part Names............................................................................................ 2-3

1.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 2-3
1.2 Optical Paths of Lasers .................................................................................................................. 2-5
1.2.1 Laser Unit........................................................................................................................... 2-5
1.2.2 Microscope Part (TIRF-PAU Illuminator and Ti-E System)................................................ 2-6
1.3 Safety Labels.................................................................................................................................. 2-7
1.3.1 Ti-U Microscope Body........................................................................................................ 2-8
1.3.2 Ti-E Microscope Body ........................................................................................................ 2-9
1.3.3 LU4A Four-laser Module A (with LU4-B5 Beamsplitter 50/50 installed)............................. 2-10
1.3.5 TI-LU4SU Shutter Unit LU4 ............................................................................................. 2-12
1.3.6 TIRF-PAU Illuminator ....................................................................................................... 2-13
1.4 Name of Each Part ....................................................................................................................... 2-14
2. Preparations........................................................................................................................................ 2-25
2.1 Check Items and Tools ................................................................................................................. 2-25
2.2 Overview of Setup Procedure ...................................................................................................... 2-26
3. Setting Up the PC and Operation Software ..................................................................................... 2-27
4. Setting Up the Microscope ................................................................................................................ 2-28

4.1 Overall Configuration ................................................................................................................... 2-28
4.2 Setup Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 2-29
4.2.1 Assembling Each Part and Attaching Them to the Microscope....................................... 2-29
4.2.2 Attaching the Laser Safety Kit.......................................................................................... 2-37
4.2.3 Attaching the Stage Up Kit ............................................................................................... 2-39
4.2.4 Attaching the Back Port Unit ............................................................................................ 2-42
5. Laser Unit ............................................................................................................................................ 2-44

5.1 Overview of the Laser Units ......................................................................................................... 2-45
5.1.1 LU4A Four-laser Module A (with LU4-B5 Beamsplitter 50/50 installed) .......................... 2-45
5.2 Installation of the LU4-B5 Beamsplitter 50/50 (TIRF-PAU system) ............................................. 2-51
5.2.1 Preparation....................................................................................................................... 2-51
6. Connection between the Laser Unit and the Microscope .............................................................. 2-56
6.1 Setting and Connecting the TI-LU4SU Shutter Unit LU4 ............................................................. 2-56
6.2 Attaching the Optical Fiber to the Light Source ........................................................................... 2-59
6.3 Replacement of Optical Path Switch Mirror ................................................................................. 2-61
6.4 Cable Connections (Four Laser Module A).................................................................................. 2-63
7. Confirmation and Check Sheet ......................................................................................................... 2-64

7.1 Checking Procedure..................................................................................................................... 2-64
7.2 Check Sheet................................................................................................................................. 2-65
8. Specifications and Performance....................................................................................................... 2-67

8.1 Overall Configuration ................................................................................................................... 2-67
2-1
Contents
8.2 Environmental Conditions ............................................................................................................ 2-70

8.3 Safety Standards Compliance...................................................................................................... 2-71
2-2
1 System Configurations and Part Names
1.1 Overview
The following illustrates the standard configuration to use the TIRF-PAU illuminator in combination with the
Ti-E. You can also refer to the following when using Ti-U instead of Ti-E as the configuration is substantially
the same except the microscope.
TIRF-PAU illuminator and Ti-E system overview (front view)
(Standard configuration to use the TIRF-PAU illuminator)
(1)
(4)
(2)
(15)
L4 L3 L2 L1 POWER
(14)
(8)
(5)
(16)
(6)
(7) (11) (13) (9) (12)
(3)
Figure 1.1-1
(1) Power supply devices for the laser devices (9) Power supply device for the diascopic
(2) LU4A four-laser module A (with LU4-B5 illumination
Beamsplitter 50/50 installed) (10) Hub controller A
(3) PC (on the microscope back, with AC adapter)
(4) Optical fiber (for TIRF) (11) TIRF-PAU illuminator
(5) Optical fiber (for PAU) (12) HG fiber light source
(6) TI-LU4SU shutter unit LU4 (13) Remote control pad

(7) TV camera (video camera) (14) Laser safety cover
(8) TI-FLC-E/HQ motor epi-fl filter turret (15) Interlock cable
(16) USB cable
2-3
1.1 Overview
TIRF-PAU illuminator and Ti-E system overview (top view)
(1)
(15) (11)
(4) (5) (10)
(2)
(14)
(16)
(12)
(7) (9)
(3)
(8)
(6)
(13)
Figure 1.1-2
(1) Power supply devices for the laser devices (9) Power supply device for the diascopic
(2) LU4A four-laser module A (with LU4-B5 illumination
Beamsplitter 50/50 installed) (10) Hub controller A
(3) PC (on the microscope back, with AC adapter)
(4) Optical fiber (for TIRF) (11) TIRF-PAU illuminator

(5) Optical fiber (for PAU) (12) HG fiber light source
(6) TI-LU4SU shutter unit LU4 (13) Remote control pad
(7) TV camera (video camera) (14) Laser safety cover

(8) TI-FLC-E/HQ motor epi-fl filter turret (15) Interlock cable
(16) USB cable
2-4
1.2.1 Laser Unit
(3) (2) (1)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(8)
(6)
(7) (5) (5) (7)

(with LU4-B5 Beamsplitter 50/50 installed)
Figure 1.2-1
(1) Laser mounting position L1 (5) Motorized shutters

(See the table below.) (6) Laser coupling mirror
(2) Laser mounting position L2 (7) Laser outlet (single-mode optical fiber)
(8) AOTF brightness adjustment part
Table 1.2-1
Laser mounting position
Model name
L1 L2 L3 L4
LU4A
630 nm to 650 nm 400 nm to 445 nm 455 nm to 515 nm 540 nm to 595 nm
four-laser module A
2-5
1.2.2 Microscope Part (TIRF-PAU Illuminator and Ti-E System)
TIRF-PAU illuminator and Ti-E system (top view)
Laser light
Laser light
Figure 1.2-2
TIRF-PAU illuminator and Ti-E system (front left view)
Optical fiber
Laser safety cover

Laser light
UC AM
T
OD BE
R TO
SE RE N
LA SU IO
PR
3B PO AT
S EX DI
AS D RA
CL OI R
AV SE
LA
RE
TIRF-PAU illuminator
ER ED
TU
IVE EM RE
AP ITT
JE SU
OB PO
CT IS
OM R EX
HT
LIG
FR SE D
LA OI
AV
Motorized epi-fl filter turret
CAUTIO
LASER N
– CLASS
AVOID RADIAT
EXPOS ION 3B
VORSIC URE WHEN
KLASS HT TO
WENN E – LASER THE OPEN
3B,
NICHT ABDEC BEAM
STRAH
DEM KUNG
STRAH LUNG
GEÖFF
L AUSSE
NET
TZEN
Laser light AVO

ID
LASE EXP
FROMR LIGH OSU
THIS T IS RE

APEREMIT
TURETED

CAUTIO
LASER N –
CLASS
AVOID RADIAT
EXPOS ION 3B
VORSIC URE WHEN
KLASS HT TO OPEN
– LASER THE BEAM
WENN E 3B,
NICHT ABDEC STRAH
DEM KUNG LUNG
STRAH
GEÖFF
L AUSSE
NET
TZEN
Optical fiber
TV camera
Figure 1.2-3
The TV camera can be installed in a side port (right or left port) or the bottom port (only for Ti-E/B). To
change the optical path, use the optical path selector switch on the microscope.
Note that the laser shutter automatically closes when the microscope optical path is changed to the
eyepiece. It is not possible to observe images, obtained by irradiating the laser to the specimen, from the
binocular part of the microscope.
2-6
1.3 Safety Labels
1.3 Safety Labels
(1) IEC warning label - laser hazard (2) IEC explanatory label - Class 3B laser (3) Model name and serial number label
symbol product
TIRF-PAU
LASER RADIATION
(4) Safety standard label (5) IEC caution label - Class 3B area (6) IEC caution label - Class 3B area
TI-LUSU/TI-LU4SU CAUTION – CLASS 3B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. VORSICHT – LASERSTRAHLUNG KLASSE 3B,
conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN
and NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN
operation.

ICES-003.
MADE IN JAPAN
(7) IEC aperture label 1 (8) IEC aperture label 2 (9) TIRF-PAU special label
AVOID EXPOSURE
AVOID EXPOSURE
PAU TIRF
(10) Caution label (11) IEC caution label - Class 4 area
Figure 1.3-1
2-7
1.3 Safety Labels
1.3.1 Ti-U Microscope Body
The following safety labels are affixed to the product. Before using the product, check that individual labels
are affixed at their correct positions.
(1) IEC warning label - laser hazard (2) IEC explanatory label - Class 3B laser (6) IEC caution label - Class 3B area
symbol product
KLASSE 3B,

CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
(6)
(1) (7)
(2)
OD AM
T
UC
R PR BE
LASE RE TO
S 3B POSU N
CLAS EX DIATIO
RE
RTU
E APETED
AVOIDR RA
JEC IS EMRE
TIV IT
LASE
M OB HT SU
FRO ER LIG PO
LASOID EX
AV
CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B, HLUNG
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
AVOID EXPOS
LASER LIGHT URE
APERTUR CAUTION
– CLASS
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
ON
OFF
(6) 6V30W
12V100W
MAX.
Figure 1.3-2
2-8
1.3 Safety Labels
1.3.2 Ti-E Microscope Body
(1) IEC warning label - laser hazard (2) IEC explanatory label - Class 3B laser (6) IEC caution label - Class 3B area
symbol product
KLASSE 3B,

CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
(6)
(1) (7)
(2)
PRO M
T
ER BEA
DUC
LAS TO
SS OSU ON
3B RE
RE
CLA ID EXP IATI
RTU
E APETED
AVO ER RAD
M OBJE T RE
CTIV EMIT
FRO R LIGH OSU
IS
LAS
LASE EXP
ID
AVO
CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B, HLUNG
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
AVOID EXPOS
LASER LIGHT URE
APERTUR CAUTION
– CLASS
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
(6)
Figure 1.3-3
2-9
1.3 Safety Labels
1.3.3 LU4A Four-laser Module A (with LU4-B5 Beamsplitter 50/50 installed)
(1) IEC warning label - laser hazard symbol (11) IEC caution label - Class 4 area
This Class A digital apparatus complies

with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numerique de la classe A est

This device complies with Part conforme a la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause
harmful interference,and
LU4A
(2) this device must accept any NIKON CORPORATION, JAPAN
interference received, including
interference that may 100-240V~ 50/60Hz
cause undesired operation. 2A-1A 60001
(11) (1)
Figure 1.3-4
* For the laser path inside the laser unit, see Section 1.2.1, “Laser Unit.”
2-10
1.3 Safety Labels
The following safety label is affixed to the product. Before using the product, check that the label is affixed at
the correct position.
(10) Caution label
(Front view)
(10)
(Rear view)
Figure 1.3-5
2-11
1.3 Safety Labels
1.3.5 TI-LU4SU Shutter Unit LU4
(4) Safety standard label (9) TIRF-PAU special label
PAU TIRF
conditions:
and
operation.

ICES-003.
MADE IN JAPAN
TI-LU4SU
(9) PAU TIRF LASER
EMISSION
POWER
(Top view)
(2)this device must accept any interference received,
Cet appareil numerique de la classe A est conforme
691201
(1)this device may not cause harmful interference,

(4)
a la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
MADE IN JAPAN
operation.
conditions:
ICES-003.
and
(Bottom view)
Figure 1.3-6
2-12
1.3 Safety Labels
1.3.6 TIRF-PAU Illuminator
(3) Model name and serial number label (5) IEC caution label - Class 3B area (6) IEC caution label - Class 3B area
(5)
(3)
3B
CAUTION – CLASSN WHEN OPEN
LASER RADIATIO E TO THE BEAM
AVOID EXPOSUR
(6)
(5) (6)
ÖF N
ET
GE ETZE
NG
3B EN OP AM
FN
EN
LU
AS WH E BE
G SS
AH
ICH , UN AU
– CLTION TO TH
TR
RS 3B CK HL
RS
VO SE DE RA
SE
ION DIA RE
S
KL NN ABM ST
LA
CA R RAPOSU
T–
WE HT DE
LASER RADIATIO E TO THE BEAM
SE EX
CAUTION – CLASSN WHEN OPEN
AS
OID
NIC
UT
AV
LA
3B
AVOID EXPOSUR
ÖF N
ET
GE ETZE
NG
3B EN OP AM
FN
EN
LU
AS WH E BE
G SS
AH
ICH , UN AU
– CLTION TO TH
TR
RS 3B CK HL
RS
VO SE DE RA
SE
ION DIA RE
S
KL NN ABM ST
LA
CA R RAPOSU
T–
WE HT DE
SE EX
AS
OID
NIC
UT
AV
LA
CA
LA
AV SER
UT
ION
OID RA
EX DIAT
– CL
VO PO IO
SU N W
AS
KL RS
RE HE
S 3B
W AS IC
NIEN
SEHT TO N
CH N
– TH OP
T
3B LA
AB
DE
DE
, SE
E BE EN
M
CK
ST RS AM
RA
UN
TR
G
HL
AH
GE
AU LU
ÖF
SS
NG
FN
ET
ZEET
(6)
Figure 1.3-7
2-13
TIRF-PAU illuminator and Ti-E system
TI-TIRF-PAU
TIRF-PAU illuminator Filter slider cover
To laser unit
Laser safety cover
To PC
TI-LU4SU
shutter unit LU4 TI-LU4SU
LASER
EMISSION
POWER
Filter cube cover retaining plate TI-RCP remote control pad


(front panel)
Figure 1.4-1
TIRF-PAU illuminator and Ti-U system
TI-TIRF-PAU Filter slider cover

TIRF-PAU illuminator (part of laser safety kit)
To laser unit
Laser safety cover
To PC
TI-LU4SU
shutter unit LU4 TI-LU4SU
LASER
EMISSION
POWER
Z Speed XY Speed
FL Block 1 OBJ
PFS L100/E100 INTSL
Filter cube cover retaining plate

(part of laser safety kit) Ergo controller
Optical path selector knob
Figure 1.4-2
2-14
TIRF-PAU illuminator
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(20)
(10)
(17) (14) (16)
(6)
FFNEN
ET
G
3B OP AM
GE ETZ
LUN
EN
SS EN BE
G SS
AH
CLA N WH THE
ICH , UN AU
STR
RS 3B CK L
TIO TO
ER
VO SSE DE AH
LAS
ION DIA RE
KLANN ABM STR

CA ER RAPOSU
WE HT DE
T
LAS EX
OID
NIC
UT
AV
FFNEN
ET
G
3B OP AM
GE ETZ
LUN
EN
SS EN BE
G SS
AH
CLA N WH THE
ICH , UN AU
STR
RS 3B CK L
TIO TO
ER
VO SSE DE AH
LAS
ION DIA RE
KLANN ABM STR

CA ER RAPOSU
WE HT DE
T
LAS EX
OID
NIC
UT
AV
CA
LA
AV SER
UT
ION
(7) (8) (9)

OID RA
(13) (12) (15)

EX DIATIO
PO
CLAS
VO
KL RS SU N WH
RE
S 3B
WEAS IC
NN SE
NIC HT TO EN
HT
TH OP
AB
DE
3B LA
DE
, SE
E BE EN
M
CK
ST RS
UN
AM
RA
G
TR
HL
AH
GE
AU
LU
FF NG
SS
ET
NE
ZE
T
N
(11) (18)
(19)
Figure 1.4-3
Parts used in the TIRF microscopy operation Parts used in the epi-fl microscopy
(1) Optical fiber operation
(2) Laser position adjustment knob (12) Aperture diaphragm centering screws
(for forward and backward adjustment) (13) Aperture diaphragm open/close lever
(3) Focal point adjustment knob (14) ND filter sliders
(4) Condenser lens locking screw (15) Excitation filter slider
(5) Excitation filter slider (16) Connector for the epi-fl light source
Parts used in the PAU illumination operation (17) Auxiliary filter holder
(6) Optical fiber Parts used in common to all operation
(7) Laser focus adjustment knob (18) Field diaphragm centering screws
(8) Laser focus adjustment knob clamp screw (19) Field diaphragm open/close lever
(9) Laser position adjustment knob (20) Mirror switching lever
(for right and left adjustment) (* when the total reflection mirror is
(10) Laser position adjustment knob attached)
(for forward and backward adjustment) Push in: mirror in (PAU illumination)
Pull out: mirror out (TIRF illumination)
For switching the optical path between TIRF (or PAU) illumination and epi-fl illumination or adjusting the
focal point of the TIRF illuminator right and left (i.e., TIRF illumination angle), use the TI-RCP remote
control pad (or TI-ERGC ergo controller for Ti-U) or the software.
2-15
TI-RCP remote control pad (When Ti-E or Ti-E/B used only)
User can perform the following operations using

The optical path is changed between laser
irradiation (TIRF or PAU illumination) and
episcopic illumination.
adjustment *
TIRF Angle button TIRF / EPI button * The laser is adjusted right or left and the
illumination angle of TIRF illumination (total
Figure 1.4-4 reflection illumination) is adjusted.
Laser safety cover
The cover prevents laser light from leaking. If the

laser safety cover is not attached, the motorized
shutters of the laser unit do not open.
CAUTION
VORSICHT
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
Upper cover
Laser safety cover
Body
R PRODBEAM
UCT
LASE TO
CLAS EXPO TION
S 3B SURE
URE
AVOIDR RADIA
APERTD
TIVEEMITTE
SURE
LASE
OBJEC IS

LASER EXPO
FROM LIGHT
AVOID
Figure 1.4-6
CAUTION
VORSICHT
KLASSE
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
3B
TO THE BEAM
– LASERSTRAHLUNG
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
AVOID EXPOSURE
LASER LIGHT
APERTURE CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
Figure 1.4-5
2-16
Laser safety kit
Filter slider cover The laser safety kit is supplied with all laser
products mounted onto a Ti microscope.
Dia pillar illuminator
Labels affixed to each laser product include a
name label and other types of necessary labels,
CAUTION
both of which are not shown here.
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT

3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG G
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
Filter cube port

Safety label (6) cover retaining plate cover, protection plate for nosepiece, filter cube
port cover retaining plate, and safety labels, “(6)
Protection plate
IEC caution label – Class 3B areas” and “(8) IEC
(for nosepiece) aperture label”. Before using the microscope,
PRO M
T
ER BEA
DUC
LAS TO
SS OSU N
3B RE
CLA ID EXP IATIO
E
AVO ER RAD
TUR
E APERTED
I RE
CTIVS EMIT
FRO R LIGH OSU
LAS
LASE EXP
M OBJE T
ID
AVO
CHECK that each part of the laser safety kit is

correctly attached. (See the figure below.)
Filter slider cover
The filter slider cover is a component designed for
CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG G
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
AVOID EXPOSUR
LASER LIGHT E
APERTURE CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
preventing unintended exposure of eyes or skin at

3B, G
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
Analyzer port ON
OFF
the slider port to laser light emitted to the dia-pillar

6V30W
illuminator. To attach it to the Ti microscope, lay it

12V100W
MAX.
Safety label (8) over the dia-pillar illuminator and secure it with the
Safety label (6)
(Both sides)
(Both sides)
screws and nuts provided with the kit.
Figure 1.4-7 Filter cube port cover retaining plate
The filter cube port cover retaining plate is a
component designed for preventing accidental
(6) IEC caution label - Class 3B area leakage of laser light upon occurrence of
unintended opening of the filter cube port cover.
Attach it to the side of the epi-fl filter turret’s lower
plate using the screws provided with the kit.
KLASSE 3B,
NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN Safety labels
The label (6) affixed to the upper left side (when
(8) IEC aperture label 2 viewed from the Binocular eyepiece tube) of the dia
pillar indicates that the laser light may come out
AVOID EXPOSURE
from the aperture when the lamphouse is removed
FROM THIS APERTURE for replacement of the lamp inside.
Figure 1.4-8 Another labels (6) on both sides of the microscope
base indicates that the laser light may come out
from the aperture while attaching the epi-fl filter
turret or the nosepiece to the microscope.
The labels (8) on both sides of the microscope
base indicates that the laser light may come out of
the analyzer port.
2-17
Protection plate (for nosepiece)

The protection plate (for nosepiece) is a
component designed for shielding the gap between
the nosepiece and the epi-fl filter turret to avoid
accidental jamming of fingers inserted into the gap
or the laser radiation from the gap.
Two types of protection plate are prepared for the
nosepiece being used. One for the TI-N6, TI-ND6
and TI-ND6-E nosepieces is supplied with Ti-E and
Ti-E/B, and the other for the TI-ND6-PFS
nosepiece is supplied with the nosepiece. Follow
the procedure described in “4.2.2 Attaching the
Laser Safety Kit” to attach the protection plate in
place.
Filter cube port TI-FLC-E or The epi-fl filter turret is used to select an excitation
(and its cover) TI-FLC-E/HQ method by rotating the turret to change filter cubes
Alternatively, use the TI-FLC epi-fl filter turret for
manual change of filter cubes.
Front
Shutter lever
(O: open, C: close)
Figure 1.4-9
Indicator lamp The shutter unit controls motorized shutters in the

laser unit.
PAU shutter
switch
TIRF shutter
switch
Laser shutter switch Power lamp
Figure 1.4-10
2-18
Optical path selector switch (Ti-E, Ti-E/B)

Coarse
Fine
ExFine
Ti-E
BRIGHT
NESS
FOCUS tter
DISP
LAY Epi Shu
EYE Z-RESET
k
ON
FL Bloc
MEM
L100 ORY
PFS
s

R100 Refocu
L80
1.5X
1X
Escape
FL Block switch L100 Left port 100%

(filter cube selector)
Optical path selector switch R100 Right port 100%
Figure 1.4-11
Ti-E/B
L100 Left port 100%
B100 Bottom port 100%
Optical path selector knob (Ti-U, Ti-U/B)

PORT Ti-U *
R Right port 100%
PORT dial AUX Auxiliary port
(optical path selector knob) (Visual observation/left port = 20:80)
(Visual observation/right port = 20:80)
Figure 1.4-12
L Left port 100%
Ti-U/B
R Right port 100%
B Bottom port 100%
L Left port 100%

is 20 to 80.
follows:
R Right port 100%
L Left port 100%
2-19
Four-laser module A (LU4A)

(3) (5) Single-mode fiber
(1) (7) AC inlet
(2)
(8) Remote switch
(5) (9) CONTROLLER connector
(12) LUSU connector
(13) USB connector
Figure 1.4-13 (14) LD connector
(12)
(6) (14)
(7) (11)
(8) (10) (9) (13)

Figure 1.4-14
L4 L3 L2 L1 POWER
Figure 1.4-15
* For details of available lasers for each position of laser units, see Table 8.1-2, “Mountable lasers,” in
Section 8.1, “Overall Configuration” in Chapter 8, “Specifications and Performance.”
2-20
Four-laser PS rack (LU-LR)

(1) (2)
(6) Cooling fan
(9) Caution label
Front view
(5)
(4) (6) (13) AC inlet for 5 A line
(7) (8)
(9)
(10)
(12)
(13) (11)
Rear view
Figure 1.4-16
2-21
TI-BPU back port unit
Adding a camera port by attaching the TI-BPU back port unit to the microscope base allows for a concurrent
image capture with two cameras.
Attach a C mount camera via a separate C mount adapter to the back port unit and perform focus adjustment
and centering.
A separate TI-BP-EX back port extension kit is required to use the back port unit together with the TIRF-PAU
illuminator unit and it can only be attached to the lower tier.
Important
The dichroic mirror inside the filter cube is used to split the optical path, therefore, the dichroic mirror with
a poor flatness may cause lens effect due to a curved surface reflection, resulting in poor image
formation.
Use a dichroic mirror with higher flatness to be used for optical path split.
C mount adapter Focus knob (separately available)

clamp screws (two) TI-BP-EX back port extension kit
(separately available)
C mount adapter Clamp screw
To eyepiece
Centering screws (two) Portion to be inserted into
the microscope
Figure 1.4-17
2-22
the TIRF-PAU illuminator unit and TI-BPU back port unit simultaneously.
The unit that can be attached to the upper or lower tier is selectable in accordance with the intended use.
However, in combination of the TIRF-PAU illuminator unit with the TI-BPU back port unit, the TIRF-PAU
illuminator unit cannot be attached to the lower tier.
Important
The condensing position of the TIRF-PAU illuminator unit will be misaligned when it is attached to the
lower tier.
When attaching to the lower tier, embed the TI-TIRF stage up lens into the illuminator unit to correct the
condensing position and provide the optimum illumination performance.
Contact your own Nikon representative for details on the stage up lens.
The following figure shows the Ti-U with the stage up kit mounted, along with the TIRF-PAU illuminator unit
on the upper tier and the back port unit (with the extension kit) on the lower tier:
TIRF-PAU illuminator unit
Epi-fl filter turret (upper tier)
Epi-fl filter turret (lower tier)

Back port unit
(with the extension kit)
Figure 1.4-18
2-23
Positioning pin
Stage support block Nosepiece support block
Epi-fl filter turret Shielding plate Epi-fl filter turret

support block (left) support block (right)
Positioning pin
Dia-illuminator pillar support block Support pillar extension
Figure 1.4-19
2-24
2 Preparations

For items and tools required, refer to 2.1, “Check Items and Tools” in Chapter 2 of Part 1.
2-25
Setting Up the PC and

1 Operation Software
(Chapter 3)
• Attaching the light source (TI-TIRF-PAU)

(Chapter 4)
• Attaching the dichroic mirror (TI-PAU only)
• Attaching the epi-fl filter turret (TI-FLC, TI-FLC-E, or
TI-FLC-E/HQ)
• Assembling the microscope
• Attaching the field diaphragm unit
• Attaching the laser safety cover
• Mounting the filter cubes
• Attaching the camera
3 Laser Unit (Chapter 5)

• For the four-laser module A
Connection between the Laser • Connection to the Shutter Unit

4 Unit and the Microscope
(Chapter 6)
• Connection to the fiber light source (TI-TIRF-PAU)
• Replacing the optical path switch mirror (if necessary)
Confirmation and • Laser safety check

5 Check Sheet
(Chapter 7)
• Check sheet entry
2-26
3 Setting Up the PC and Operation Software
Using TIRF and PAU microscopy, images are observed on a monitor, via a camera attached to the
microscope camera port. TIRF images and laser port images from PAU microscopy cannot be observed
through the eyepieces. Make sure to set up the PC and operation software for the camera to be used.
2-27
Table 4.1-1
Ti-E
Ti-E/B
Ti Use the TI-DH Dia Pillar Illuminator 100W.
Ti-U
Ti-U/B
Apo
TIRF 60xH/1.49
Apo
TIRF 100xH/1.49
Plan Apo
Objective for TIRF 60xH/1.45 Select the appropriate objective for
TIRF microscopy Plan Apo observations.
TIRF 100xH/1.45
Plan Apo
VC 60xH/1.4
Microscope and
accessories Plan Apo
VC 100xH/1.4
Shutter unit LU4 TI-LU4SU
TI-FLC
The TI-FLC-E/HQ comes with three special
high-precision filter cubes.
TI-FLC-E/HQ
Epi illumination lamp and Make sure to read the instruction manuals for
power supply device the products.
Stage ring 26

TI-BSUK70 70 mm stage up kit and the
TI-BP-EX back port extension kit are required.
Back port extension kit TI-BP-EX TI-BSUK70 70 mm stage up kit is required.
TIRF-PAU TIRF-PAU TI-TIRF-PAU No optical path selector mirror is included.

illuminator Optical fiber C1 single mode fiber
TIRF image
observation
devices TV camera An adapter is required to connect to the
(video camera) microscope port.
See “Chapter 5 Laser Unit” for details on
Laser unit Four-laser module A LU4A
which lasers can be mounted.
Beam splitter Beamsplitter 50/50 LU4-B5 To be installed in the four-laser module A.
Laser power
Four-laser PS rack LU-LR For the four-laser module A
supply
2-28
4.2 Setup Procedure
4.2 Setup Procedure
4.2.1 Assembling Each Part and Attaching Them to the Microscope
Perform the steps below to assemble each part and attach them to the microscope.
1 TIRF-PAU illuminator installation ⇒ Page 2-30
2 Attach the dichroic mirrors (photo activation illuminator unit only). ⇒ Page 2-31
3 Attach the field diaphragm unit. ⇒ Page 2-32
4 Attach the epi-fl filter turret. ⇒ Page 2-32
5 Assemble the remaining microscope parts. ⇒ Page 2-33
6 Attach the laser safety cover (TIRF illuminator unit only). ⇒ Page 2-33
7 Attach the light shielding plate. ⇒ Page 2-33
8 Attach the filter cubes. ⇒ Page 2-34
9 Attach the camera. ⇒ Page 2-34
10 Affix the labels. ⇒ Page 2-35
2-29
4.2 Setup Procedure
1 TIRF-PAU illuminator installation
1. Remove the clamping screws 1 and 2 from the part used in PAU illumination operation.
2. Press the part used in PAU illumination operation into the microscope to secure it.
3. Attach the two support legs (for two areas) on the part used in PAU illumination operation to
adjust the height.
4. Attach both parts used in TIRF-microscopy operation and for PAU illumination operation to
secure them. (Remove the clamping screw 1 in advance, or you may fail to attach the parts.)
5. Attach both the optical fibers for the parts used in TIRF-microscopy operation and PAU
illumination operation. Adjust the height of each part to approx. 110 mm as shown in the figure
to secure it.
6. Perform optical adjustments for the parts used in TIRF-microscopy operation and PAU
illumination operation.
This is the end of the TIRF-PAU illuminator installation.
CAUTION
– CLASS
Optical fiber for TIRF

LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
Approx.
AUSSETZEN
110 mm

PRO M
T
ER BEA
DUC
LAS TO
SS OSU ON
3B RE
RE
CLA ID EXP IATI
RTU
E APETED
AVO ER RAD
M OBJE T RE
CTIV EMIT
FRO R LIGH OSU
IS
LAS
LASE EXP
ID
AVO
Fixing screw 1
PAU illuminator unit
CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
Support legs
3B, HLUNG
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
AVOID EXPOS
LASER LIGHT URE
APERTUR CAUTION
– CLASS
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
Fiber for PAU
Fixing screw 2
Figure 4.2-1
2-30
4.2 Setup Procedure
2 Attach the dichroic mirrors (photo activation illuminator unit only).
It is necessary to attach a dichroic mirror (optical path switch mirror), which switches between laser light and
episcopic illumination, inside the photo activation illuminator unit. Since the attachment does not ship with a
mirror attached, you must attach one following the procedure below.
You can also change the light intensity ratio of laser light and episcopic illumination by switching the dichroic
mirror and operating the optical path switch lever.
Ordinarily, you should attach a total reflection mirror. When using a total reflection mirror, operating the
optical path switch switches between 100% laser light and 100% episcopic illumination.
WARNING
Cap 1. Remove the retaining screw for the cap of the

mirror replacement opening using the Allen
wrench, and then remove the cap by turning it
counterclockwise.
Figure 4.2-2
Holder plate locking screws 2. Remove the mirror unit from inside the
illuminator, and insert the dichroic mirror.
(1) When removing the mirror unit, pull out the
mirror switch lever, and then pull out the
mirror unit while holding the tab of the mirror
unit (magnetic lock).
Holder plate
(2) Remove the two holder plate locking
screws. Next, remove the holder plate and
flat spring to attach the mirror.
Flat spring • Mirror size: 36 x 25.7 x 1
Mirror 3. Attach the mirror unit in its original position, and

(Place the then close the cap of the mirror replacement
reflection
surface
opening.
downward.) (1) There is a positioning hole on the mirror
unit. Securely attach the mirror unit to the
illuminator to fit the pin on the main body.
Mirror unit (2) Screw the cap of the mirror replacement
opening until it is closed.
Figure 4.2-3
(3) Tighten the optical path switching module
screw using the Allen wrench, and secure
the cover.
2-31
4.2 Setup Procedure
3 Attach the field diaphragm unit.
Locking screw 1. Remove the rubber cap on the left side of the
microscope.
2. Insert the field diaphragm unit.
3. Tighten the locking screw using an Allen wrench,
and secure the field diaphragm unit.
CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B, HLUNG
WENN ABDECKUN
NICHT DEM G
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
Field diaphragm unit
Figure 4.2-4
4 Attach the epi-fl filter turret.
Attach the epi-fl filter turret to the microscope main body.

Insert the epi-fl filter turret along the attachment groove from the right side of the microscope and
secure with screws on the left and right. (Use an Allen wrench. Note that the screws should be
tightened after the filter cube port cover is removed.)
Insert from right
Filter cube port (and its cover)
Front side
Figure 4.2-5
When using the epi-fl filter turret in combination with the Ti-E or Ti-E/B, the protection plate (for
nosepiece) must be installed between the epi-fl filter turret and the nosepiece.
* For installation procedure, see Section 4.2.2, “Attaching the Laser Safety Kit.”
2-32
4.2 Setup Procedure
5 Assemble the remaining microscope parts.
Refer to the instruction manual included with the microscope main body before assembling the
remaining microscope parts.
6 Attach the laser safety cover (TIRF illuminator unit only).
If you are using the TIRF illuminator unit, the motorized

shutter will not open unless the laser safety cover is
attached on the stage. Make sure it is attached in the
CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
VORSICHT
TO THE BEAM
3B,
prescribed position.
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
Laser safety cover 1. Place the laser safety cover body on the stage,
and secure it by tightening the 4 screws with the
Allen wrench.
2. Connect the laser safety cover’s cable to the
PRO M
T
ER BEA
DUC
LAS TO
CLA ID EXP IATION
3B RE
SS OSU
TURE
AVO ER RAD
APERTED
OBJE IS RE
CTIVE EMIT
FROMR LIGHT OSU
LAS
LASE EXP
ID
AVO
safety-cover connector of the TI-LUSU shutter

unit.
CAUTION
KLASSE
NICHT DEM
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
VORSICHT
TO THE BEAM
– LASERSTRAHLUNG
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
AVOID EXPOSURE
LASER LIGHT
3. Attach the cover on top of the body.
APERTURE CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
The interlock will close the motorized shutter of

VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
the laser unit if the cover is removed during use.

ON
OFF
6V30W
12V100W
MAX.
* In the case of the photo activation illuminator unit,

you must attach a specimen cover on the stage
Upper cover when using episcopic illumination or laser light.
* Touching the interlocking part or getting it wet could
cause it to malfunction.
Safety interlock (both sides) Body
Figure 4.2-6
7 Attach the light shielding plate.
Light shielding plate Using an Allen wrench, screw the light shielding plate
onto the eyepiece tube.
Figure 4.2-7
2-33
4.2 Setup Procedure
8 Attach the filter cubes.
You can attach up to six filter cubes in the epi-fl filter turret.
Indication of address 1. Remove the filter cube port cover, check the turret
on the optical path address, and insert the filter cubes along the guide
(position for ID sticker) groove.
2. Rotate the filter cube rotation control to display the
same address and affix an ID sticker that matches
the filter cube type.
Affix or (a blank sticker that can be written
on freely) on spaces in which no filter cube is
inserted.
AVOID EXPO
LASER LIGHT SURE
FROM THIS IS EMITT
APERTURE ED CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIAT 3B
AVOID EXPOS ION WHEN OPEN
URE TO THE
BEAM
VORSICHT
KLASSE – LASERSTRAHLU
3B, NG
WENN ABDECK
UNG
3. Re-attach the filter cube port cover.

NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
Excitation method
changeover ring Note: Excitation and barrier filters can be removed
from the filter cube and replaced with other
Address marking filters. (The filters are screwed into the filter
Filter cube cube.)
Important
• Three exclusive high-precision filter cubes are
Excitation filter supplied with the TI-FLC-E/HQ motorized epi-fl
filter turret as accessories. These filter cubes
Set the filter cube with its excitation filter
facing outside. (Do not set it in opposite way.) are adjusted to the address of the epi-fl filter
turret. Make sure to attach the exclusive
Figure 4.2-8 high-precision filter cubes by matching the
inscribed addresses.
retaining plate • If you use an excitation filter attached to the
excitation filter slider, attach the filter cube to
the excitation filter.
Fixing screw
Figure 4.2-9
9 Attach the camera.
Attach the camera to the camera port.
2-34
4.2 Setup Procedure
10 Affix the labels.

After confirming the safety of the laser (p.2-64 to 2-66), affix the specified warning labels to the
locations shown below.
Left side of microscope main unit

Affix “(7) IEC caution label - Class 3B area” on the left side of the microscope main unit, under the field
diaphragm.
Both sides of microscope main body

Affix “(7) IEC caution label - Class 3B area” and “(9) IEC aperture label 2” above the right and left ports
of the microscope main unit.
On 100W dia pillar illuminator

Affix “(7) IEC caution label - Class 3B area” on the dia pillar illuminator 100W.
CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
(7)
OD AM
T
UC
R PR BE
LASE RE TO
S 3B POSU N
CLAS EX DIATIO
RE
RTU
E APETED
AVOIDR RA
JEC IS EMRE
TIV IT
LASE
M OB HT SU
FRO ER LIG PO
LASOID EX
AV
CAUTION
– CLASS
LASER RADIATION 3B
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B, HLUNG
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
AVOID EXPOS
LASER LIGHT URE
APERTUR CAUTION
– CLASS
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
(7)
ON
OFF
6V30W
12V100W
MAX.

Figure 4.2-10
2-35
4.2 Setup Procedure
On the laser safety cover (TIRF illuminator unit)

(2) (1)
Laser
LASER RADIATION
safety cover
(8)
AVOID EXPOSURE
Stage top surface
Figure 4.2-11
Top surface of stage (photo activation illuminator unit)

(2) (1)
About 5 mm About 5 mm
Stage top surface
About 5 mm
LASER RADIATION
About 5 mm
AVOID EXPOSURE
(8)
Figure 4.2-12
2-36
4.2 Setup Procedure
Laser unit
Remove the laser safety label if it is attached to the laser unit.
Remove the laser

safety labels.
About 12 mm
About 20 mm
About 12 mm
About 30 mm
Figure 4.2-13
4.2.2 Attaching the Laser Safety Kit
Refer to the instruction manual included with the microscope main body before attaching the laser safety kit.
1. Attach the filter slider cover to the dia pillar

Filter slider cover
illuminator 100W.
Dia pillar Put the filter slider cover from above the dia
illuminator
pillar illuminator 100W and secure it using the
Screws and nuts screws and nuts provided with the laser safety
(both side) kit.
Figure 4.2-14
2. Attach the protection plate for nosepiece

between the epi-fl filter turret and the nosepiece.
Notes on attaching the nosepiece --- When the epi-fl filter turret is used
The protection plate for nosepiece is a component designed for shielding the gap between
the nosepiece and the epi-fl filter turret to avoid accidental jamming of fingers inserted into
the gap or the laser radiation from the gap.
Two types of protection plate are prepared for the nosepiece being used. One for the TI-N6,
TI-ND6 and TI-ND6-E nosepieces is supplied with Ti-E and Ti-E/B, and the other for the
TI-ND6-PFS nosepiece is supplied with the nosepiece. Follow the procedure below to attach
each protection plate.
2-37
4.2 Setup Procedure
If the Perfect Focus System is not used

1) Remove the two M3 hexagon socket head
M5 Hexagon TI-N6 (6 nosepiece), bolts secured on top of the epi-fl filter turret
socket head TI-ND6 (DIC 6 nosepiece), or
bolts (x 2) TI-ND6-E (motorized DIC 6 nosepiece)
M3 Hexagon Protection plate to the Ti-E and Ti-E/B.
socket head (for nosepiece)
bolts (x 2)
2) Attach the protection plate (for nosepiece)
appended to the Ti-E or Ti-E/B to the top
portion of the epi-fl filter turret and secure
the plate using the two M3 hexagon socket
head bolts removed in step 1).
3) Attach the nosepiece (TI-N6, TI-ND6, or
TI-ND6-E) to the Ti-E or Ti-E/B and secure
G
N
AM
ET
N
AVOID EXPOS
it using the 4-mm hexagonal screwdriver
appended to the Ti-E and Ti-E/B.
LASER LIGHT URE
APERTUR CAUTION
– CLASS
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
3B,
WENN ABDECKUNG
NICHT DEM
STRAHL GEÖFFNET
AUSSETZEN
Figure 4.2-15
If the Perfect Focus System is used

1) Remove the four M3 hexagon socket head
M5 Hexagon TI-ND6-PFS bolts secured on top of the epi-fl filter turret
socket head (motorized PFS
bolts (x 2) 6 nosepiece)
Cable port to the Ti-E and Ti-E/B.
M3 Hexagon Protection plate 2) Attach the protection plate (for PFS6
socket head (for PFS6 nosepiece) nosepiece) appended to the PFS6
bolts (x 4)
nosepiece to the top portion of the epi-fl
filter turret and secure the plate using the
four M3 hexagon socket head bolts
removed in step 1).
3) With the cable of the PFS6 nosepiece
being routed through the cable port of the
M
protection plate to the Ti-E or Ti-E/B, attach
the PFS6 nosepiece to the Ti-E or Ti-E/B
T
AVOID EXPOS
LASER LIGHT URE
APERTUR CAUTION
– CLASS
TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT
and secure it using the 4-mm hexagonal

3B,
WENN AB
Figure 4.2-16 screwdriver appended to the Ti-E and

Ti-E/B.

Filter cube port 3-1. After attaching the filter cube, re-attach the
cover retaining filter cube port cover. (For how to attach
plate the filter cube, see the instruction manual
included with the microscope main body.)
3-2. Attach the filter cube port cover retaining
plate to the side surface of the epi-fl filter
turret’s lower plate using the screws
Fixing screw
provided with the laser safety kit.
Figure 4.2-17
2-38
4.2 Setup Procedure
4.2.3 Attaching the Stage Up Kit
the TIRF-PAU illuminator unit and TI-BPU back port unit simultaneously.
Attach the stage up kit immediately after attaching the eyepiece base unit and the epi-fl filter turret on the
lower tier.
1. Attach the stage support block to the eyepiece base unit.

The installation surface of the eyepiece base unit has one positioning pin. Align it with the bottom
surface of the stage support block, and use the 4-mm hexagonal screwdriver supplied with the
microscope to secure it by tightening two hexagon socket head bolts.
2. Attach the epi-fl filter turret support block (right/left) respectively to the right/left side of the base plate of
the epi-fl filter turret attached on the lower tier.
Use the 2.5-mm hexagonal wrench supplied with the epi-fl filter turret to secure them by tightening two
hexagon socket head bolts respectively.
3. Attach a shielding plate on the top of the epi-fl filter turret support blocks.
Use the 2-mm hexagonal screwdriver supplied with the microscope to secure it by tightening four
hexagon socket head button bolts.
4. Attach the nosepiece support block on the installation surface of the nosepiece on the microscope.
Use the 4-mm hexagonal screwdriver supplied with the microscope to secure it by tightening two
hexagon socket head bolts.
5. Attach the dia-illuminator pillar support block on the installation surface of the dia-illuminator pillar on
the microscope.
The installation surface of the dia-illuminator pillar on the microscope has two positioning pins. Align
them with the positioning holes on the bottom surface of the dia-illuminator pillar support block, and use
the 4-mm hexagonal screwdriver supplied with the microscope to secure it by tightening four hexagon
socket head bolts.
6. The support pillar extension supplied with the stage up kit is used to extend the support pillar supplied
with the illuminator unit when the TIRF-PAU illuminator unit is attached on the upper tier. Attach the
support pillar extension between the support pillar and the bottom of the epi-fl illuminator unit of the
TIRF-PAU illuminator unit.
2-39
4.2 Setup Procedure
Hexagon socket head bolt Hexagon socket head bolt

(M5, two) (M5, four)
Shielding plate
(M5, two)
Stage support block

Dia-illuminator pillar support
Hexagon socket head button bolt block
(M3, four)

(left)
Nosepiece support block
(M3, two)

(right)

(M3, two)
Figure 4.2-18
2-40
4.2 Setup Procedure
Attaching the support pillar extension
To attach the TIRF-PAU illuminator unit to the upper tier, attach the support pillar extension supplied with the
stage up kit to the support pillar supplied with the illuminator unit.
Support pillar extension

(supplied with the stage up kit)
Support pillar
(supplied with the illuminator unit)
Figure 4.2-19
2-41
4.2 Setup Procedure
4.2.4 Attaching the Back Port Unit
Insert the back port unit into the guide on the rear of the microscope body and use the hexagonal
screwdriver (4-mm) to secure it from behind by tightening screws.
• The following figure shows the back port unit being attached to the lower tier.
• To attach the unit to the upper tier, attach a unit to be attached to the lower tier first and then attach the
one to the upper tier.
• You must have installed the HUB controller when you use a HUB controller.
• Attach the camera at the end.
Insert the back port unit body
Figure 4.2-20
It can be attached only to the lower tier when combined with the TIRF-PAU illuminator unit.
A separate back port extension kit is also required, which should be incorporated before attaching to the
microscope body.
2-42
4.2 Setup Procedure
Attaching the back port extension kit
When combined with the TIRF-PAU illuminator unit, you need to attach the TI-BP-EX back port extension kit
and shift the camera mount position backward.
1. Split the TI-BPU back port unit.
Remove the M4-10 hexagon socket head bolts (four) from the microscope connection side to split it.
2. Attach the extension tube (extension kit).
Use the M4-12 hexagon socket head bolts (four) supplied with the extension kit to secure the extension
tube on the back port unit (at the camera connection side).
3. Attach the back port unit (at the microscope connection side).
Use the M4-10 hexagon socket head bolts (four) that were removed in Step 1 to secure the back port
unit (at the microscope connection side) on the extension tube.

M4-12 (four)
(supplied with the extension kit)
Hexagon socket
head bolt
M4-10 (four)
Back port unit

(at the camera
connection side)
Extension tube
(extension kit)
Back port unit

(at the microscope
connection side)
Figure 4.2-21
2-43
5 Laser Unit
WARNING
• The unit must be set up as instructed by the local LSO (Laser Safety Officer).
• This laser unit uses Class 3B lasers. Accidental exposure of eyes or skin to laser light may result in
injury or other problems. Do not turn on the lasers until they are installed in the laser unit
• Confirm that there is no one in the area before turning on the lasers.
• Always wear laser-protection goggles while lasers are turned on.
• Do not place tools or optical components such as mirrors in the light path while lasers are turned on.
• Use the lowest output power rating during setup. For Ar lasers, use standby mode during setup.
• The laser units are heavy. Without the lasers installed, the four-laser module A weighs approximately
43 kg. Do not attempt to lift laser units unassisted.
• The laser manual must be provided to the user.
CAUTION
The four-laser module A is designed to be used on top of the four-laser PS rack. The laser unit
is so heavy that it can injure the human body when dropped. To avoid injury, be careful not to
accidentally push the four-laser module A off the four-laser PS rack.
2-44
5.1.1 LU4A Four-laser Module A (with LU4-B5 Beamsplitter 50/50 installed)
This laser unit is mounted with four kinds of lasers (with one laser product per color) selected from the lasers
listed in Table 8.1-2 Recommended lasers. To adjust laser intensity, control the AOTF with the operation
software. Each laser on this unit is equipped with a motorized shutter controllable by the TI-LU4SU shutter
unit LU4 or the software. Each laser beam is halved by the built-in Beamsplitter 50/50 (LU4-B5) and the
resultant beams are led into the TIRF-PAU illuminator through the two single-mode optical fibers. A motorized
shutter is provided between the Beamsplitter 50/50 and each of the single-mode optical fiber outlets. To
control these shutters, select optical path by the Shutter unit LU4 or the software.
Each one of the four orange LEDs on the front of the unit lights up to indicate that the motorized shutter for the
corresponding laser is ready to be opened for laser emission. When the motorized shutter is closed, the
corresponding LED does not light up.
(7)
L4 L3 L2 L1 POWER
(1)
(9)
(2) (6)
Indicating shutter conditions (3) (5) (4) (8)
(1) Power switch

This is the main power switch of this unit.
When this switch is pressed, power is supplied to the primary source only. Power supply to the
secondary source is subject to the state of the remote switch (3).
(2) AC inlet
(3) Remote switch
This is the remote power switch of this unit.
When this switch is on, power is supplied to the secondary source in conjunction with the power supply
to the PC.
When this switch is off, power is supplied to the secondary source when the power switch (1) is pressed,
This connector is for future extension. (Do not use in this system.)
This connector is for future extension. (Do not use in this system.)
2-45

CONF: Do not use in this system.
MIC: This connector is for the interlock cable to connect a microscope.
TIRF: This connector is for a cable to connect the laser safety cover.
(7) LUSU connector
This connector is for cables to connect the shutter unit LU4.
(8) USB connector
This connector is for a USB cable to connect a PC.
(9) LD connector
This connector is for future expansion. (Do not use in this system. Otherwise, a malfunction occurs.)

• The laser head and the optical fiber are precisely aligned in these units.
Avoid subjecting the laser head or optical fiber to vibration or shock. Contact the distributor
if you need to remove the laser head from the unit due to laser malfunction or other reasons.
2-46
Table 5.1-1
Mountable position
Product name
LU4A four-laser module
A

56 RCS series (56 RCS/S 2780) L2
400 to 410 nm (36 mW)
56 RCS series (56 RCS/S 2781) L2
440 to 445 nm (20 mW)
CUBE series (CUBE405) L2 (b)
405±5 nm (50, 100 mW)
445±5 nm (40 mW)
IMA101series
L3
IMA 101040 ALS, IMA 101065 ALS
457 to 514 nm (40, 65 mW)
163 series (163-C02) L3
457 to 514 nm (40 mW)

163 series (163-C12) L3
488 nm (25 mW)
161C-030 L3
488 nm (10 mW)
85BCD series (85BCD010, 85BCD020, 85BCD030) L3 (a)
488±0.5 nm (10, 20, 30 mW)
Sapphire 488 LP series L3 (a)
488±2 nm (10, 20, 25, 30, 50, 75 mW)
Sapphire 488HP series (heatsink supplied) L3 (c)
488±2 nm (100, 200 mW)
05LGP193 L4
543.5 nm (1 mW)

85YCA series (85YCA010, 85YCA020, 85YCA025) L4
561 nm (10, 20, 25 mW)
56 ICS series (56 ICS/S 2669) L1
638 nm (10 mW)
640+2/-5 nm (40 mW)
2-47
Table 5.1-2
Adapter list
(a) MXA22070 (C-LAR488 laser adapter)
(b) Special adapter
(c) Special adapter
2-48
An EMISSION key switch (3) on the front panel turns on/off the laser power. The power switch (4) on the rear
panel supplies the power to the system. The laser is emitted when the power switch (4) on the rear panel and
the EMISSION switch (3) on the front panel are both set on. In the normal usage condition, the power switch
(4) and the 15A breaker (7), and the 5A breaker (8) are set on.
(1) (2)
(3)
(Front view)
(5)
(4) (6)
(7) (8)
(9)
(10)
(12)
(13) (11)
(Rear view)
Figure 5.1-3

The LED turns on when lasing occurs.
The LED turns on when the system is energized.
The LED color changes depending on the system status.
Orange: Only the Four-laser PS rack control system is energized. No laser is turned on. (Standby
status)
Green: The four-laser PS rack control system and all lasers are energized.
2-49

The switch turns on lasers and emits lasers.
The key is in vertical position ( O ): The lasers stop emitting and the key can be extracted.
The key is in horizontal position ( I ): The lasers start emitting.
(4) Power switch
This is the main switch of the LU-LR Four-laser PS rack.
When turning on this switch only, the laser does not start firing.
The connector is used to disable the remote interlock function. When the connector is open, no laser
emits (remote interlock status). To disable the remote interlock function, attach the provided interlock
jumper connector.
(6) Cooling fan
The fan cools the power supply devices in the LU-LR Four-laser PS rack. When lasers are energized,
the fan starts.
The breaker protects over-current of the LU-LR Four-laser PS rack controller and the Ar laser power
supply. Normally it is turned on.
The breaker protects over-current of the lasers other than Ar laser. Normally it is turned on.
(9) Caution label
The inlet supplies power to the LU-LR Four-laser PS rack control system and the Ar laser. When no
power is supplied to the inlet, the Four-laser PS rack does not work.
CAUTION
the country.

The inlet supplies power to lasers other than the Ar laser.
CAUTION
the country.
2-50
5.2 Installation of the LU4-B5 Beamsplitter 50/50 (TIRF-PAU system)
5.2 Installation of the LU4-B5 Beamsplitter 50/50 (TIRF-PAU

system)
The procedure for installing the LU4-B5 beamsplitter 50/50 into the LU4A four-laser module A is described
below.
For the setup procedure for the LU4A four-laser module A, refer to 5.4, “LU4A Four-laser Module A” in
Chapter 5 of Part 1.
5.2.1 Preparation
(1) (2) (3) (4) Confirm that the following accessories have been
provided.
(1) Mirror unit (x1)
(2) Additional shutter unit (x1)
(3) Fiber coupling device for additional fiber (x1)
(4) Fiber cover block (x1)
(5) Fiber block (x1)
(6) M3 hexagonal bolts (x2)
(7) M4 hexagonal bolts (x4)
(5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (8) Cable clamp (x1)
Figure 5.2-1 (9) Light shield (x1)
(10) Fiber cover plate (x1)
* Nameplate (not shown in the figure) (x1)
2 Removing the sheet metal cover
Sheet metal cover Remove the sheet metal cover on the side.
Figure 5.2-2
2-51
3 Attaching the beamsplitter 50/50
(1) Remove the reference shutter located behind the

AOTF for the LU4A four-laser module A
Attach the shutter.
Reference shutter
Figure 5.2-3
(2) Attach the shutter.

Remove the reference shutter detached from the
optical path on the reference optical fiber side.
Attach the additional shutter on the optical path
on the additional optical fiber side.
(3) Attach the mirror unit
Secure the supplied mirror unit with two fixing
screws.
Reference shutter Mirror unit Additional shutter
Figure 5.2-4
(4) Replace the reference fiber block

Remove the reference fiber block to attach the
supplied fiber block, then secure the four-laser
module A. (with 50/50 indicated)
Fiber block
Figure 5.2-5
(5) Attach the fiber coupling device for the additional

fiber.
(6) Connect the cables.
Cut off the harness band.
Connect the shutter cables and arrange them.
Secure the cables with the cable retainers so that
they do not disturb the optical path.
Two black cable connectors are not to be used.
Additional fiber coupling
Figure 5.2-6
2-52
Figure 5.2-7
4 Adjusting the reference optical fiber
Manually open the shutter with a tool.

Adjust the optical axis so that the 488-nm laser beam,
the reference for other lasers, passes through the
centering tool placed in front of the fiber coupling
device. (Refer to Section, "5.4.5 Final Adjustment for
the Ar Laser Light with the Optical Fiber" in Part 1.)
Adjust all the four lasers mounted on the laser unit so
that each laser beam is led into the fiber.
Reference fiber coupling Use the regular procedure for setting up the LU4A four
laser module A without a beamsplitter.
Figure 5.2-8
For other three lasers, use the beam shift part and
dichroic mirror adjustment part of each laser.
Note that with respect to the three lasers other than the
reference 488-nm laser, the laser incidence efficiency
in terms of the brightness at the fiber end is about
40%, based on the brightness in front of the coupler.
5 Adjusting the additional optical fiber
Manually open the shutter with a tool.

Adjust the additional optical fiber so that the 488-nm
laser beam is led into it, by using the four adjustment
parts of the fiber coupling device only.
Use the procedure for setting up the fiber coupling
device of the C-LU3EX 3 laser unit EX (3).
During the adjustment, do not touch any part other
than the fiber coupling device for additional optical
Additional fiber coupling fiber.
Figure 5.2-9
This is the end of the adjustment of the additional optical fiber.
2-53
6 Attaching the fiber cover
(1) Attach the fiber cover.

Attach the light shield to the fiber.
Light shield
Figure 5.2-10
(2) Attach the fiber cover plate.
Fiber cover plate

Figure 5.2-11
(3) Attach the fiber cover block.
Fiber cover block

Figure 5.2-12
This is the end of the attachment of the fiber cover block.
2-54
7 Affixing the name plate
Affix the supplied name plate on the rear panel of the

LU 4 - B5
four-laser unit LU4A.
31001
JAPAN
This Class A digital apparatus complies

with Canadian ICES-003.
LU 4 - B5
Cet appareil numerique de la classe A est 31001
This device complies with Part conforme a la norme NMB-003 du Canada. JAPAN
15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause
harmful interference,and
LU4A
(2) this device must accept any NIKON CORPORATION, JAPAN
interference received, including
interference that may 100-240V~ 50/60Hz
cause undesired operation. 2A-1A 60001
Figure 5.2-13
This is the end of the beamsplitter 50/50 installation.
2-55
6 Connection between the Laser Unit and the Microscope
6.1 Setting and Connecting the TI-LU4SU Shutter Unit LU4
Option switch Laser unit connector
Indicator lamp
TI-LU4SU
LASER
EMISSION
POWER
Power lamp
Laser shutter switch
Figure 6.1-1
Settings
Settings are not required.
Connecting the TI-LU4SU unit

1. Connect the cable of the laser unit to the TI-LU4SU shutter unit LU4.
Hang the nylon clamp supplied with the TI-US4SU shutter unit LU4 from the loop of the cable for the
laser unit, then secure it with the spacer in between the screw holes.
Select the screw hole appropriate for installation on each side, then remove the cap from all of the four
screw holes to secure them.
2-56
Cable of the
Cap Nylon clamp laser unit
TI-LU4SU
LASER
EMISSION
Connecting to the LU4A POWER
TI-LU4SU
Cap Spacer
Fixing bolts Nylon clamp
Cable of the laser unit
Figure 6.1-2
2-57
Affixing the switch label

If the LU4-B5 beamsplitter 50/50 is attached to the four-laser module A, affix the TIRF-PAU special label
supplied with the TI-LU4SU shutter unit LU4.
TIRF-PAU special label
Figure 6.1-3
2-58
Using straight fiber (part used in PAU illuminator)

Attach the straight fiber adapter when using a straight fiber, which has a straight tip, rather than C1
single-mode fiber.
1. Remove the FC connector. Below that, remove all the screws for the round plate attached to the stage.
2. In place of the round plate, use the same screws to secure the straight fiber adapter into place. See
Figure 6.2-1 for the up-down positioning.
3. Re-attach the FC connector.
Up
Straight fiber adapter
Straight fiber
adapter
Straight fiber
Figure 6.2-1
2-59
Attaching the Fiber

1. Loosen the two M4 setscrews, and remove the round ring metal cover.
2. Draw the optical fiber through the round ring metal cover and attach the optical fiber to the FC
connector. Be sure to align the optical fiber with the FC connector's notch, and fully screw in the knurled
section.
3. Secure the round ring metal cover with the two M4 setscrews.
Fiber
FC connector
FC connector
Fiber
Part used in PAU illumination operation
Part used in TIRF illumination operation
Figure 6.2-2
Fiber clamp for the part used in TIRF illumination operation

1. Secure the fiber support plate of the round ring metal cover over the part used in TIRF illumination
operation.
2. Gently bend the fiber, then pinch it over the fiber support plate with the clamp.
Bend the fiber, then adjust the height to approx. 110 mm from the top of the round ring metal cover.
When using the 100W dia pillar illuminator, be sure to avoid contact with the fiber as tilting the pillar.
Fiber
Fiber support plate
Approx.
110 mm
Clamp
Figure 6.2-3
2-60
To replace the optical path switch mirrors, which switch between the laser light and epi-fl illumination light,
perform the following.
WARNING
Cap 1. Remove the retaining screw for the cap of the mirror
replacement opening.
Figure 6.3-1
2. Remove the cap of the mirror replacement opening

(threaded cap).
Figure 6.3-2
3. Pull out the mirror switch lever, and then pull out the
mirror unit while holding the tab of the mirror unit
(magnetic lock).
Figure 6.3-3
2-61
Holder plate locking screws 4. Remove the two holder plate locking screws. And then,
remove the holder plate and flat spring to replace the
mirrors.
Mirror size: 36 x 25.7 x 1
Holder plate
5. Assembly is the reverse of disassembly.
Flat spring Place the reflection surface of the mirror downward into
the cutout of the mirror frame.
Mirror There is a positioning hole on the mirror unit. Securely

(Place the
reflection
attach the mirror unit to the illumination attachment to fit
surface the pin on the main body.
downward.)
Figure 6.3-4
CAUTION
To using the laser beam for passing through the mirror, if the mirror is not set in a collimated angle,
interference fringes may appear in the PA-GFP illumination. Carefully set the mirror in a collimated
angle except when using a total reflection mirror.
(Standard collimated angle for the half mirror is 5".)
2-62
6.4 Cable Connections (Four Laser Module A)
6.4 Cable Connections (Four Laser Module A)

Connect cables between units, as shown in Figure 6.4-1 and Table 6.4-1.
4LA7 L1 to L4
4LA1 4LA2 4LA3 4LA8 4LA4 4LA5 4LA6
Figure 6.4-1 LU4A 4 laser module A
Table 6.4-1 Table of Cable Connections

Unit Connector Connector Connect to Connector Remarks
No. Name (Name)
Four 4LA1 AC IN AC power inlet

laser
module A 4LA2 AOTF/PC Do not use. Refer to the Power control
respective
4LA3 CONTROLLER Do not use. instruction Shutter control
4LA4 CONF Do not use. manual. Interlock signal
4LA5 MIC Microscope Interlock switch

Supplied with the
4LA6 TIRF Laser safety cover
TI-LU4SU
TI-LU4SU Shutter Unit Supplied with the
4LA7 LUSU
LU4 TI-LU4SU
4LA8 PC(TIRF-PAU) PC USB cable
L1 LD(OPTION) (For future expansion) Do not use. Do not use in this

system. Otherwise,
L2 (For future expansion) a malfunction
L3 (For future expansion) occurs.
L4 (For future expansion)
2-63
7 Confirmation and Check Sheet
7.1 Checking Procedure
The system is a FDA Class 3B and EN Class 3B laser product. The laser devices are FDA Class 3B and EN
Class 3b components. The final confirmation for the laser safety standards should be done after setting up.
Put a laser safety label on the prescribed place after confirming.
(1) Laser intensity power
The recommended lasers can be put on the laser unit. (Refer to P.2-47.) Follow the process below and
confirm that calculated values satisfy the standard values to check laser intensities. If a calculated laser
intensity exceeds the standard value, contact the department in charge and do not ship the laser
product.
(1) Maximize each laser intensity.
(2) Remove all of movable ND filters from the optical path and adjust the argon laser to its maximum
power.
(2) Labels
Confirm the following labels put on the prescribed place. (Refer to P.2-35 to 2-37.)
• Laser radiation label.
• Laser safety label.
(3) Check sheet
Fill out the necessary items on the check sheet and send it to the department in charge.
2-64
7.2 Check Sheet
7.2 Check Sheet
The person setting up the system should check the details listed in the sheet below and enter the results.
The completed sheet should be sent to the supervisor.
Table 7.2-1
Serial number
TI-TIRF-PAU Illuminator
Shutter unit (model name: )
Laser unit (model name: )
1. Setup and user
Table 7.2-2
Setup date
Setup location
Person performing setup
User Name:
Address:
Contact:
2. Product configuration
Table 7.2-3
No. Product
1 Microscope Main unit Ti-E Ti-E/B Ti-U Ti-U/B
2 Shutter unit TI-LU4SU
3 Laser Laser Unit LU4A
4 Laser name L1 : (ND: )
L2 : (ND: )
L3 : (ND: )
L4 : (ND: )
5 Laser PS rack Y N
6 Optical fiber Model name C1 single mode fiber/other :
2-65
7.2 Check Sheet
3. Safety checks
Table 7.2-4
No. Unit Check items Check
1 Is there a gap between the unit and laser head? Y N
2 Laser and Is the protective cover securely attached? Y N
3 laser unit Does any laser light leak from gaps in the protective cover? Y N
4 Is the sheet metal cover attached? Y N
5 Is the optical fiber securely fixed? Y N
6 Are all the retaining screws on the accessories (Field diaphragm unit,
eyepiece tube, fluorescent lamp, nosepiece, condenser, diascopic Y N
illumination) securely tightened?
7 Are objectives or caps mounted in all the openings in the nosepiece? Y N
8 Are cameras or caps attached to all ports? Y N
9 Does the motorized shutter on the laser unit close when the laser safety
Microscope Y N
cover is detached in TI-TIRF-PAU Illuminator?
10 Does the motorized shutter on the laser unit close when the optical path in
Y N
the microscope main unit is switched to the eyepiece?
11 Is the dia-illuminator 100W attached? Y N
12 Is the protection plate attached between the epi-fl filter turret and the
Y N
nosepiece or between the epi-fl filter turret and the PFS nosepiece?
13 Is the lock attached after the filter cube port cover is attached? Y N
14 Are labels affixed at the specified locations? Y N
4. Power check
Table 7.2-5
No. Check items Measured Value
1 L1: %
2 Optical fiber efficiency: L2: %

Laser intensity ratio between incident light and outgoing light of the
3 single mode fiber L3: %
4 L4: %
5 L1: mW
6 Laser intensity at aperture: L2: mW

Maximum intensity of the laser emitted from the opening of the
7 nosepiece for each laser unit L3: mW
8 L4: mW
Power meter Manufacturer:

Model name:
Serial number:
Calibration date:
2-66
8 Specifications and Performance
Table 8.1-1
Ti-E
Ti-E/B
Ti Use the TI-DH Dia Pillar Illuminator 100W.
Ti-U
Ti-U/B
Apo
TIRF 60xH/1.49
Apo
TIRF 100xH/1.49
Plan Apo
Objective for TIRF 60xH/1.45 Select the appropriate objective for
TIRF microscopy Plan Apo observations.
TIRF 100xH/1.45
Plan Apo
VC 60xH/1.4
Microscope and
accessories Plan Apo
VC 100xH/1.4
Shutter unit LU4 TI-LU4SU
TI-FLC
The TI-FLC-E/HQ comes with three special
high-precision filter cubes.
TI-FLC-E/HQ
Epi illumination lamp and Make sure to read the instruction manuals for
power supply device the products.
Stage ring 26
TI-BSUK70 70 mm stage up kit and the

TI-BP-EX back port extension kit are required.
Back port extension kit TI-BP-EX TI-BSUK70 70 mm stage up kit is required.
TIRF-PAU TIRF-PAU TI-TIRF-PAU No optical path selector mirror is included.

illuminator Optical fiber C1 single mode fiber
TIRF image
observation
devices TV camera An adapter is required to connect to the
(video camera) microscope port.
Laser unit Four-laser module A LU4A See Table 8.1-2 for mountable lasers.
Beam splitter Beamsplitter 50/50 LU4-B5 To be installed in the four-laser module A.
Laser power
Four-laser PS rack LU-LR For the four-laser module A
supply
2-67
Mountable lasers
For the beam divergence and the maximum power, see the manual for each laser device.
Table 8.1-2
Mountable unit and
position

Head: 56 RCS series (56 RCS/S 2780) 400 to 410 nm (36 mW) L2
Power supply: 56 IMA series (56 IMA021)
Head: 56 RCS series (56 RCS/S 2781) 440 to 445 nm (20 mW) L2
Diode laser Power supply: 56 IMA series (56 IMA021)
(violet) Manufacturer: Coherent
1
Head: CUBE series (CUBE405) 405±5 nm (50,100 mW) L2 *
1
Head: CUBE series (CUBE445) 445±5 nm (40 mW) L2 *
Head: IMA101 series
457 to 514 nm (40,65 mW) L3
IMA 101040 ALS, IMA 101065 ALS
Head: 163 series (163-C02) 457 to 514 nm (40 mW) L3
Air-cooled Power supply: 263C series
argon laser
Head: 163 series (163-C12) 488 nm (25 mW) L3
Manufacturer: Spectra-Physics
Head: 161C-030 488 nm (10 mW) L3
Power supply: 263-C04
Head: 85BCD series (85BCD010, 488±0.5 nm
L3 *1
85BCD020､85BCD030) (10, 20, 30 mW)
Solid-state 488±2 nm
Head: Sapphire 488 LP series L3 *1
laser (Blue) (10, 20, 25, 30, 50, 75 mW)
Head: Sapphire 488HP series 1
488±2 nm (100, 200 mW) L3 *
(Heatsink supplied)
HeNe laser Head: 05LGP193
543.5 nm (1 mW) L4
(green) Power supply: 05LPL951-065: for 100V
05LPL915-065: for 115/230V
Solid-state Head: 85YCA series (85YCA010,
561 nm (10, 20, 25 mW) L4
laser (yellow) 85YCA020, 85YCA025)
Power supply: 85YCA series (supplied)
2-68
Mountable unit and

position

Head: 56 ICS series (56 ICS/S 2669) 638 nm (10 mW) L1
Diode laser Power supply: 56 IMA series (56IMA022)
(red) Manufacturer: Coherent
Head: CUBE series (CUBE640) 640+2/-5 nm (40 mW) L1 *1
2-69

Table 8.2-1
Temperature 5 to 35°C
Electric shock protection class Class I

Indoor use only
Storage conditions
Table 8.2-2
Temperature –20 to 60°C
2-70
Table 8.3-1
Laser safety • This product complies with IEC60825-1 Class 3B requirements.
CE marking • This product meets EU Low Voltage Directive requirements.

Other categories • This product complies with FCC15B Class A requirements.

Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference
at his own expense.
• This product complies with Canadian EMI standards. (ICES-003 Class A)
Canada.
• This product complies with Australian EMI standards. (AS/NZS CISPR11)
2-71

M456 - E5 - Ti TIRF TIRF-E TRIF-PAU & PAGFP Series - Setup PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

M456 - E5 - Ti TIRF TIRF-E TRIF-PAU & PAGFP Series - Setup PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

M456 E 10.9.NF.

TI-TIRF Illuminator Unit

Be sure to observe the warnings and cautions described in this manual to

WARNING and CAUTION Symbols Used in This Manual

Disregarding instructions marked with this symbol may lead to injury or

All procedures should be performed safely and in accordance with the

Meaning of the Symbols Used on the Product

Warning label - laser hazard symbol

Precautions against heat

Wavelength: 400 to 700 nm (CW)

3. Manuals and accessories

4. Intended application of the product

5. Setting up the product

8. Pre-operation check items

9. Never attempt to look into the laser light.

11. Mercury lamp and xenon lamp

12. Use the ultraviolet light shield

2. Precautions on connecting cables

4. Do not wet the product.

5. Do not place any object on the product.

Configuration of This Manual

• Part 1 For Setting Up TI-TIRF, TI-TIRF-E, or TI-PAU

1. System Configurations and Part Names............................................................................................ 1-4

3. Setting Up the PC and Operation Software ..................................................................................... 1-70

4. Setting Up the Microscope ................................................................................................................ 1-71

5. Laser Unit ............................................................................................................................................ 1-93

7. Confirmation and Check Sheet ....................................................................................................... 1-228

8. Specifications and Performance..................................................................................................... 1-231

1.1.1 TIRF Illuminator Unit and Ti-U System Overview

TIRF illuminator unit and Ti-U system overview (front view):

(2) (10) (12)

(1) Power supply devices for the laser devices

TIRF illuminator unit and Ti-U system overview (top view):

WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET

NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN

Exclusive use for TI-TIRF system

(1) Power supply devices for the laser devices

TIRF illuminator unit and Ti-U system overview (front view):

(1) Power supply devices for the laser devices

TIRF illuminator unit and Ti-U system overview (top view):

(Standard configuration to use the TIRF illuminator unit)

WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET

NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN

(1) Power supply devices for the laser devices

1.1.2 Motorized TIRF Illuminator Unit and Ti-E System Overview

(2) (11) (14)

(3) (5) (6) (15) (7) (13) (9) (12)

(1) Power supply devices for the laser devices

(Standard configuration to use the motorized TIRF illuminator unit)

(2) (15) (11) (10)

Exclusive use for TI-TIRF system

(1) Power supply devices for the laser devices

(5) (6) (12) (8) (11)

(1) Power supply devices for the laser devices

(Standard configuration to use the motorized TIRF illuminator unit)

(15) (10) (9)

(5) (7) (12)

(1) Power supply devices for the laser devices

(19) (20) (10) (13)

(16) (18) (12) (8) (11)

(11) HG fiber light source (23) 561-nm laser adapter with ND

(19) (15) (20) (10) (9)

Photo activation illuminator unit and Ti-U (front view):